Audio, Visual & Navigation System: Section

DRIVER INFORMATION & MULTIMEDIA
AUDIO, VISUAL & NAVIGATION SYSTEM

SECTION AV B
E
CONTENTS
DISPLAY AUDIO WITHOUT BOSE DISPLAY AUDIO WITHOUT BOSE .................. 29 F
Wiring Diagram ........................................................29
PRECAUTION .............................................. 11
BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 42 G
PRECAUTIONS ..................................................11
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ........ 42
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- Work Flow ................................................................42
SIONER" ................................................................. 11 H
Precaution for Harness Repair ................................ 11 INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT .................. 44
Precaution for Work ................................................ 12 REGISTRATION (AUDIO UNIT) ................................44
REGISTRATION (AUDIO UNIT) : Description ........44 I
PREPARATION ........................................... 13
REGISTRATION (AUDIO UNIT) : Work Proce-
PREPARATION ..................................................13 dure .........................................................................44
Special Service Tool ............................................... 13 J
Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 13
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 46
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .... 46
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................. 14 K
AUDIO UNIT ...............................................................46
COMPONENT PARTS .......................................14 AUDIO UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure .......................46
Component Parts Location ...................................... 14
Audio Unit ................................................................ 15 FRONT TWEETER ............................................ 47 L
Speakers ................................................................. 15 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................47
USB Interface and AUX in Jack .............................. 16
Steering Switches ................................................... 16 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER ................................ 49 M
Microphone ............................................................. 16 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................49
Combination Meter .................................................. 16
Antenna and Antenna Feeder ................................. 16 REAR DOOR SPEAKER .................................. 51
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................51 AV
SYSTEM .............................................................19
System Description ................................................. 19 MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT .................... 53
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................53 O
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AUDIO UNIT) ................20
Description .............................................................. 20 STEERING SWITCH ......................................... 55
On Board Diagnosis Function ................................. 20 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................55
P
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 26 USB CONNECTOR ........................................... 57
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................57
AUDIO UNIT .......................................................26
Reference Value ..................................................... 26
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK ................................. 58
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................58
WIRING DIAGRAM ...................................... 29
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS .............................. 59
Revision: December 2016 AV-1 2017 Rogue HEV NAM

AUDIO SYSTEM ................................................ 59 Steering Switches ................................................... 79
Symptom Table ...................................................... 59 Microphone ............................................................. 79
Combination Meter .................................................. 79
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ................ 62 Antenna and Antenna Feeder ................................. 79
Description .............................................................. 62
SYSTEM ............................................................ 82
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 64 System Description ................................................. 82
AUDIO UNIT ...................................................... 64 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AUDIO UNIT) ............... 83
Exploded View ........................................................ 64 Description .............................................................. 83
Removal and Installation ........................................ 64 On Board Diagnosis Function ................................. 83
STEERING SWITCHES ..................................... 65 ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............. 89
Exploded View ........................................................ 65
Removal and Installation ........................................ 65 AUDIO UNIT ...................................................... 89
Reference Value ..................................................... 89
FRONT TWEETER ............................................ 67
Removal and Installation ........................................ 67 BOSE SPEAKER AMP ...................................... 92
Reference Value ..................................................... 92
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER ................................. 68
Exploded View ........................................................ 68 WIRING DIAGRAM .................................... 95
Removal and Installation ........................................ 68
DISPLAY AUDIO WITH BOSE .......................... 95
REAR DOOR SPEAKER ................................... 69 Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 95
Exploded View ........................................................ 69
Removal and Installation ........................................ 69 BASIC INSPECTION ................................. 110
USB INTERFACE AND AUX IN JACK ............. 70 DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ........ 110
Removal and Installation ........................................ 70 Work Flow ............................................................. 110
MICROPHONE ................................................... 71 INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT .................. 112

Removal and Installation ........................................ 71
REGISTRATION (AUDIO UNIT) ............................. 112
ANTENNA BASE ............................................... 72 REGISTRATION (AUDIO UNIT) : Description ...... 112
Exploded View ........................................................ 72 REGISTRATION (AUDIO UNIT) : Work Proce-
Removal and Installation ........................................ 72 dure ....................................................................... 112
Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 72
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 114
DISPLAY AUDIO WITH BOSE
PRECAUTION ............................................. 73
AUDIO UNIT ............................................................ 114
PRECAUTIONS ................................................. 73 AUDIO UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ..................... 114
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- BOSE SPEAKER AMP ........................................... 114
SIONER" ................................................................. 73 BOSE SPEAKER AMP : Diagnosis Procedure ..... 114
Precaution for Harness Repair ............................... 73
Precaution for Work ................................................ 74 FRONT TWEETER ........................................... 116
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 116
PREPARATION ........................................... 75
CENTER SPEAKER ......................................... 119
PREPARATION ................................................. 75 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 119
Special Service Tool ............................................... 75
Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 75
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER ................................ 121
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................ 76
REAR DOOR SPEAKER .................................. 124
COMPONENT PARTS ....................................... 76 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 124
Component Parts Location ..................................... 76
SUBWOOFER .................................................. 127
Audio Unit ............................................................... 77
BOSE Speaker Amp. .............................................. 77
Speakers ................................................................ 77 AMP ON SIGNAL CIRCUIT .............................. 130
USB Interface and AUX in Jack .............................. 79 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 130

MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................... 131 PRECAUTIONS ............................................... 156
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 131 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System A
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
STEERING SWITCH ........................................ 133 SIONER" ............................................................... 156
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 133 Cautions in Removing Battery Terminal and AV B
Control Unit (Models with AV Control Unit) ........... 156
USB CONNECTOR .......................................... 135
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis .......................... 156
Precaution for Harness Repair .............................. 156
Precaution for Work ............................................... 157 C
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK ................................ 136
PREPARATION ......................................... 158
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 137 D
PREPARATION ............................................... 158
AUDIO SYSTEM ............................................... 137 Special Service Tool .............................................. 158
Symptom Table ..................................................... 137 Commercial Service Tools ..................................... 158
E
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ............... 142 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ........................... 159
Description ............................................................ 142
COMPONENT PARTS .................................... 159 F
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 144 Component Parts Location .................................... 159
AV Control Unit ...................................................... 160
AUDIO UNIT ..................................................... 144 Speakers ............................................................... 160
Exploded View ...................................................... 144 USB Interface and AUX In Jack ............................ 161 G
Removal and Installation ....................................... 144 Steering Switches .................................................. 161
Microphone ............................................................ 161
STEERING SWITCHES .................................... 145 Combination Meter ................................................ 161 H
Exploded View ...................................................... 145 Antenna and Antenna Feeder ............................... 161
Removal and Installation ....................................... 145 SD Card ................................................................. 163
BOSE SPEAKER AMP .................................... 147 SYSTEM .......................................................... 164 I
Removal and Installation ....................................... 147 System Description ................................................ 164
FRONT TWEETER ........................................... 148 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT) . 168 J
Removal and Installation ....................................... 148 Description ............................................................. 168
On Board Diagnosis Function ................................ 168
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER ............................... 149
CONSULT Function ............................................... 169 K
Exploded View ...................................................... 149
Removal and Installation ....................................... 149 ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............ 170
CENTER SPEAKER ......................................... 150 AV CONTROL UNIT ........................................ 170 L
Removal and Installation ....................................... 150 Reference Value .................................................... 170
REAR DOOR SPEAKER .................................. 151 DTC Index ............................................................. 173
Exploded View ...................................................... 151 WIRING DIAGRAM .................................... 174 M
Removal and Installation ....................................... 151
NAVIGATION WITHOUT BOSE ..................... 174
SUBWOOFER .................................................. 152 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 174 AV
BASIC INSPECTION ................................. 187
USB INTERFACE AND AUX IN JACK ............ 153
Removal and Installation ....................................... 153 DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ...... 187 O
Work Flow .............................................................. 187
MICROPHONE ................................................. 154
Removal and Installation ....................................... 154 INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT ................ 189
P
ANTENNA BASE ............................................. 155 ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AV
Exploded View ...................................................... 155 CONTROL UNIT ...................................................... 189
Removal and Installation ....................................... 155 ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AV
Disassembly and Assembly .................................. 155 CONTROL UNIT : Description ............................... 189
NAVIGATION WITHOUT BOSE ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AV
CONTROL UNIT : Work Procedure ....................... 189
PRECAUTION ............................................ 156

CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) ...............190 U12AE AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 206
CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : De- DTC Description .................................................... 206
scription .................................................................190 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 206
CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Work
Procedure ..............................................................190 U12AF AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 207
CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Con- DTC Description .................................................... 207
figuration List .........................................................191 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 207
REGISTRATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) ..................191 U12B0 POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE ............... 208
REGISTRATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Descrip- DTC Description .................................................... 208
tion .........................................................................191 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 208
REGISTRATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Work
Procedure ..............................................................191 U12B1 POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE ............... 209
DTC Description .................................................... 209
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ........................ 193 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 209
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT .......................... 193 U1300 AV COMM CIRCUIT .............................. 210
DTC Description ....................................................193 DTC Description .................................................... 210
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................193 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 210
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ....................... 194 U1310 CONTROL UNIT (AV) ........................... 212
DTC Description ....................................................194 DTC Description .................................................... 212
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................194
U1217 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 195
AV CONTROL UNIT ................................................ 213
DTC Description ....................................................195
AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ......... 213
FRONT TWEETER ........................................... 214
U1229 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 196
DTC Description ....................................................196
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................196 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER ................................ 216
U122F AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 197
DTC Description ....................................................197 REAR DOOR SPEAKER .................................. 218
U1244 GPS ANTENNA .................................... 198
DTC Description ....................................................198 MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................... 220
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................198 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 220
U1258 SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA ........... 199 STEERING SWITCH ......................................... 222
DTC Description ....................................................199 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 222
USB CONNECTOR .......................................... 224
U1263 USB ...................................................... 201 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 224
DTC Description ....................................................201
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................201 AUXILIARY INPUT JACK ................................ 225
U12AA CONFIGURATION ERROR ................ 202
DTC Description ....................................................202 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ........................... 226
MULTI AV SYSTEM ......................................... 226
U12AB ANTENNA ........................................... 203 Symptom Table ..................................................... 226
DTC Description ....................................................203
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................203 NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ............... 230
Description ............................................................ 230
U12AC AV CONTROL UNIT ........................... 204
DTC Description ....................................................204 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 239
AV CONTROL UNIT ......................................... 239
U12AD AV CONTROL UNIT ........................... 205 Exploded View ...................................................... 239
DTC Description ....................................................205 Removal and Installation ....................................... 239
STEERING SWITCHES .................................... 241
Exploded View ...................................................... 241 System Description ................................................ 259
Removal and Installation ....................................... 241 A
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT) . 263
FRONT TWEETER ........................................... 243 Description ............................................................. 263
Removal and Installation ....................................... 243 On Board Diagnosis Function ................................ 263
CONSULT Function ............................................... 264 B
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER ............................... 244
Exploded View ...................................................... 244 ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............ 265
Removal and Installation ....................................... 244 C
AV CONTROL UNIT ........................................ 265
REAR DOOR SPEAKER .................................. 245 Reference Value .................................................... 265
Exploded View ...................................................... 245 DTC Index ............................................................. 268
Removal and Installation ....................................... 245 D
BOSE SPEAKER AMP ................................... 270
USB INTERFACE AND AUX IN JACK ............ 246 Reference Value .................................................... 270
Removal and Installation ....................................... 246 E
WIRING DIAGRAM .................................... 273
MICROPHONE ................................................. 247
Removal and Installation ....................................... 247 NAVIGATION WITH BOSE ............................. 273
Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 273 F
GPS ANTENNA ................................................ 248
Removal and Installation ....................................... 248 BASIC INSPECTION ................................. 287
ANTENNA BASE ............................................. 249 DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ...... 287 G
Exploded View ...................................................... 249 Work Flow .............................................................. 287
Disassembly and Assembly .................................. 249 INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT ................ 289 H
NAVIGATION WITH BOSE ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AV
CONTROL UNIT ...................................................... 289
PRECAUTION ............................................ 250 ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AV I
PRECAUTIONS ................................................ 250 CONTROL UNIT : Description ............................... 289
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AV
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- CONTROL UNIT : Work Procedure ....................... 289 J
SIONER" ............................................................... 250 CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) ............... 290
Cautions in Removing Battery Terminal and AV CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : De-
Control Unit (Models with AV Control Unit) ........... 250 scription ................................................................. 290 K
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis .......................... 250 CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Work
Precaution for Harness Repair .............................. 250 Procedure .............................................................. 290
Precaution for Work .............................................. 251 CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Con- L
figuration List ......................................................... 291
PREPARATION ......................................... 252
REGISTRATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) .................. 291
PREPARATION ................................................ 252 REGISTRATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Descrip- M
Special Service Tool ............................................. 252
tion ......................................................................... 291
Commercial Service Tools .................................... 252
REGISTRATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Work
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ........................... 253 Procedure .............................................................. 291 AV
COMPONENT PARTS ..................................... 253 DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 293

Component Parts Location .................................... 253 U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ......................... 293 O
AV Control Unit ..................................................... 254
DTC Description .................................................... 293
BOSE Speaker Amp. ............................................ 254
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................ 293
Speakers ............................................................... 254
P
USB Interface and AUX In Jack ............................ 256 U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ....................... 294
Steering Switches ................................................. 256 DTC Description .................................................... 294
Microphone ........................................................... 256 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 294
Combination Meter ................................................ 256
Antenna and Antenna Feeder ............................... 256 U1217 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 295
SD Card ................................................................ 258 DTC Description .................................................... 295
SYSTEM ........................................................... 259
U1229 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 296 AV CONTROL UNIT ................................................ 315
DTC Description ....................................................296 AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ......... 315
BOSE SPEAKER AMP ........................................... 315
U122F AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 297 BOSE SPEAKER AMP : Diagnosis Procedure ..... 315
DTC Description ....................................................297
FRONT TWEETER ........................................... 317
U1244 GPS ANTENNA .................................... 298 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 317
DTC Description ....................................................298
CENTER SPEAKER ......................................... 320
U1258 SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA ........... 299
DTC Description ....................................................299
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER ................................ 322
U1263 USB ...................................................... 301 REAR DOOR SPEAKER .................................. 325

DTC Description ....................................................301
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................301 SUBWOOFER .................................................. 328
U1265 AUDIO AMP. ........................................ 302 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 328
DTC Description ....................................................302 AMP ON SIGNAL CIRCUIT .............................. 331
U12AA CONFIGURATION ERROR ................ 304 MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................... 332
DTC Description ....................................................304 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 332
STEERING SWITCH ......................................... 334
U12AB ANTENNA ........................................... 305 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 334
DTC Description ....................................................305
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................305 USB CONNECTOR .......................................... 336
U12AC AV CONTROL UNIT ........................... 306
DTC Description ....................................................306 AUXILIARY INPUT JACK ................................ 337
U12AD AV CONTROL UNIT ........................... 307 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ........................... 338
DTC Description ....................................................307
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................307 MULTI AV SYSTEM ......................................... 338
Symptom Table ..................................................... 338
U12AE AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 308
DTC Description ....................................................308 NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ............... 343
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................308 Description ............................................................ 343
U12AF AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 309 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 352
DTC Description ....................................................309
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................309 AV CONTROL UNIT ......................................... 352
Exploded View ...................................................... 352
U12B0 POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE .............. 310 Removal and Installation ....................................... 352
DTC Description ....................................................310
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................310 STEERING SWITCHES .................................... 354
Exploded View ...................................................... 354
U12B1 POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE .............. 311 Removal and Installation ....................................... 354
DTC Description ....................................................311
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................311 BOSE SPEAKER AMP ..................................... 356
U1300 AV COMM CIRCUIT ............................. 312
DTC Description ....................................................312 FRONT TWEETER ........................................... 357
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................312 Removal and Installation ....................................... 357
U1310 CONTROL UNIT (AV) .......................... 314 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER ................................ 358
DTC Description ....................................................314 Exploded View ...................................................... 358
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ... 315
CENTER SPEAKER ......................................... 359 ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............ 382
Removal and Installation ....................................... 359 A
AV CONTROL UNIT ........................................ 382
REAR DOOR SPEAKER .................................. 360 List of ECU Reference ........................................... 382
Exploded View ...................................................... 360
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT . 383 B
Reference Value .................................................... 383
SUBWOOFER .................................................. 361 Fail-Safe ................................................................ 385
Removal and Installation ....................................... 361 DTC Inspection Priority Chart ................................ 386 C
DTC Index ............................................................. 386
USB INTERFACE AND AUX IN JACK ............ 362
Removal and Installation ....................................... 362 WIRING DIAGRAM .................................... 388
D
MICROPHONE ................................................. 363 AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM ............. 388
Removal and Installation ....................................... 363 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 388
E
GPS ANTENNA ................................................ 364 BASIC INSPECTION ................................. 401
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ...... 401
ANTENNA BASE ............................................. 365 Work Flow .............................................................. 401 F
Exploded View ...................................................... 365
Removal and Installation ....................................... 365 ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
Disassembly and Assembly .................................. 365 AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT . 403 G
AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM Description ............................................................. 403
Work Procedure ..................................................... 403
PRECAUTION ............................................ 366
CONFIGURATION (AROUND VIEW MONI- H
PRECAUTIONS ................................................ 366 TOR CONTROL UNIT) .................................... 404
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System Description ............................................................. 404
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- Work Procedure ..................................................... 404 I
SIONER" ............................................................... 366
Cautions in Removing Battery Terminal, Display PREDICTIVE COURSE LINE CENTER POSI-
Control Unit, and AV Control Unit ......................... 366 TION ADJUSTMENT ....................................... 405
J
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis .......................... 366 Description ............................................................. 405
Precaution for Harness Repair .............................. 366 Work Procedure ..................................................... 405
Precaution for Work .............................................. 367
CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND K
PREPARATION ......................................... 368 VIEW MONITOR) ............................................ 406
Description ............................................................. 406
PREPARATION ................................................ 368 Work Procedure ..................................................... 406 L
Special Service Tools ............................................ 368
Commercial Service Tools .................................... 368 DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 412
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ........................... 369 U0428 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR ............. 412 M
DTC Description .................................................... 412
COMPONENT PARTS ..................................... 369 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 412
Component Parts Location .................................... 369
AV Control Unit ..................................................... 370 U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ......................... 414 AV
Around View Monitor Control Unit ......................... 370 DTC Description .................................................... 414
Rear View Camera ................................................ 370 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................ 414
Side Cameras ....................................................... 370 O
Front Camera ........................................................ 371 U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ....................... 415
Steering Angle Sensor .......................................... 371 DTC Description .................................................... 415
P
SYSTEM ........................................................... 372
System Description ............................................... 372 U111A REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIR-
Fail-Safe ................................................................ 378 CUIT ................................................................ 416
DTC Description .................................................... 416
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AROUND VIEW MON- Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 416
ITOR CONTROL UNIT) .................................... 380
CONSULT Function .............................................. 380 U111B SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE SIGNAL
CIRCUIT .........................................................
DTC Description ....................................................419 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................419 (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
SIONER" ............................................................... 445
U111C FRONT CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis .......................... 445
CIRCUIT ........................................................... 423 Precaution for Harness Repair .............................. 445
DTC Description ....................................................423 Precaution for Work .............................................. 446
PREPARATION ......................................... 447
U111D SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE SIGNAL
CIRCUIT ........................................................... 425 PREPARATION ................................................ 447
DTC Description ....................................................425 Special Service Tools ........................................... 447
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................425 Commercial Service Tools .................................... 447
U1232 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR .............. 429 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .......................... 448
DTC Description ....................................................429
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................429 COMPONENT PARTS ...................................... 448
Component Parts Location ................................... 448
U1302 CAMERA POWER VOLT ..................... 430 Audio Unit ............................................................. 448
DTC Description ....................................................430 Rear View Camera ................................................ 449
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................430 Steering Angle Sensor .......................................... 449
U1304 CAMERA IMAGE CALIBRATION ....... 435 SYSTEM ........................................................... 450

DTC Description ....................................................435 System Description ............................................... 450
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AUDIO UNIT) .............. 453
U1305 CONFIG UNFINISH .............................. 436 Description ............................................................ 453
DTC Description ....................................................436 On Board Diagnosis Function ............................... 453
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............ 459
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................437 AUDIO UNIT ..................................................... 459
List of ECU Reference .......................................... 459
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 438
WIRING DIAGRAM ................................... 460
AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM .............. 438
Symptom Table .....................................................438 REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM .................... 460
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 460
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .............. 439
AV CONTROL UNIT ........................................ 439
Exploded View .......................................................439 DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ........ 467
Removal and Installation .......................................439
AUDIO SYSTEM ...................................................... 467
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT . 441 AUDIO SYSTEM : Work Flow ............................... 467
Exploded View .......................................................441
Removal and Installation .......................................441
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 469
FRONT CAMERA ............................................ 442 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .... 469
Exploded View .......................................................442 AUDIO UNIT ............................................................ 469
Removal and Installation .......................................442 AUDIO UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ..................... 469
SIDE CAMERA ................................................ 443 REAR VIEW CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIR-
Removal and Installation .......................................443 CUIT .................................................................. 470
REAR VIEW CAMERA .................................... 444 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 470
Removal and Installation .......................................444 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ........................... 472
REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM .................... 472
PRECAUTION ............................................ 445 Symptom Table ..................................................... 472
PRECAUTIONS ............................................... 445 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 473

AUDIO UNIT ..................................................... 473 ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
Exploded View ...................................................... 473 TCU ................................................................. 496 A
Removal and Installation ....................................... 473 Description ............................................................. 496
Work Procedure ..................................................... 496
REAR VIEW CAMERA ..................................... 474
B
Removal and Installation ....................................... 474 DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 499
TELEMATICS SYSTEM
B130D TCU ..................................................... 499
PRECAUTION ............................................ 475 DTC Description .................................................... 499 C
PRECAUTIONS ................................................ 475
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System B1310 TCU ...................................................... 501
D
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- DTC Description .................................................... 501
SIONER" ............................................................... 475 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 501
Cautions in Removing Battery Terminal and AV
Control Unit (Models with AV Control Unit) ........... 475 B13D9 TCU ..................................................... 502 E
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis .......................... 475 DTC Description .................................................... 502
Precaution for Harness Repair .............................. 475 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 502
Precaution for Work .............................................. 476 B2E33 TELEMATICS SWITCH ....................... 503 F
PREPARATION ......................................... 477 DTC Description .................................................... 503

PREPARATION ................................................ 477 G
Special Service Tool ............................................. 477
B2EF0 TCU ..................................................... 505
DTC Description .................................................... 505
Commercial Service Tools .................................... 477
H
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ........................... 478
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ......................... 506
COMPONENT PARTS ..................................... 478 DTC Description .................................................... 506
Component Parts Location .................................... 478 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................ 506 I
AV Control Unit ..................................................... 478
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ....................... 507
TCU ....................................................................... 479
DTC Description .................................................... 507
Telematics Antenna .............................................. 479 J
Telematics Switch ................................................. 480
Microphone ........................................................... 480 U1A01 TCU ..................................................... 508
DTC Description .................................................... 508 K
SYSTEM ........................................................... 481
System Description ............................................... 481
Fail-safe ................................................................ 482 U1A02 TCU ..................................................... 509
DTC Description .................................................... 509 L
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCU) ........................... 483
CONSULT Function .............................................. 483
U1A03 TCU ..................................................... 510 M
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............ 485 DTC Description .................................................... 510
TCU ................................................................... 485 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 510
Reference Value ................................................... 485 U1A04 TCU ..................................................... 511 AV
Fail-safe ................................................................ 487
DTC Description .................................................... 511
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ............................... 488
DTC Index ............................................................. 488
O
U1A05 TCU ..................................................... 512
WIRING DIAGRAM .................................... 490 DTC Description .................................................... 512
TELEMATICS SYSTEM ................................... 490 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 512
P
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 490 U1A06 TEL ANTENNA ................................... 514
DTC Description .................................................... 514
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ...... 494
U1A09 GPS ANTENNA .................................. 516
Work Flow ............................................................. 494
DTC Description .................................................... 516

U1A0A TCU ..................................................... 518 TELEMATICS SYSTEM ................................... 527
DTC Description ....................................................518 Symptom Table ..................................................... 527
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ............... 528
U1A0B MICROPHONE .................................... 519 Description ............................................................ 528
DTC Description ....................................................519
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................519 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 529
U1A0E TELEMATICS SWITCH ....................... 521 AV CONTROL UNIT ......................................... 529
DTC Description ....................................................521 Exploded View ...................................................... 529
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................521 Removal and Installation ....................................... 529
U1A10 TCU ...................................................... 523 TCU ................................................................... 531

DTC Description ....................................................523 Removal and Installation ....................................... 531
TELEMATICS SWITCH .................................... 532
U1A11 TCU ...................................................... 524 Removal and Installation ....................................... 532
DTC Description ....................................................524
TEL ANTENNA ................................................. 533
MICROPHONE ................................................. 534
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 527

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [DISPLAY AUDIO WITHOUT BOSE]
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT B
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000014893873
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING: D
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, it is recommended that all mainte-
nance and repair be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. E
• Improper repair, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury
caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module,
see the SR section.
F
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or har-
ness connectors.
G
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the H
Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s)
with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly
causing serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the I
battery or batteries, and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.
Precaution for Harness Repair INFOID:0000000014844254
J
AV COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
• Solder the repaired parts, and wrap with tape. [Frays of twisted line
must be within 110 mm (4.33 in).] K
PKIA0306E
AV
• Do not perform bypass wire connections for the repair parts. (The
spliced wire will become separated and the characteristics of
twisted line will be lost.) O
PKIA0307E

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [DISPLAY AUDIO WITHOUT BOSE]
Precaution for Work INFOID:0000000014844255
• When removing or disassembling each component, be careful not to damage or deform it. If a component
may be subject to interference, be sure to protect it with a shop cloth.
• When removing (disengaging) components with a screwdriver or similar tool, be sure to wrap the component
with a shop cloth or vinyl tape to protect it.
• Protect the removed parts with a shop cloth and prevent them from being dropped.
• Replace a deformed or damaged clip.
• If a part is specified as a non-reusable part, always replace it with a new one.
• Be sure to tighten bolts and nuts securely to the specified torque.
• After installation is complete, be sure to check that each part works properly.
• Follow the steps below to clean components:
- Water soluble dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the dirty area.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
- Oily dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water with mild detergent (concentration: within 2 to 3%) and wipe the dirty
area.
• Then dip a cloth into fresh water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the detergent off.
- Do not use organic solvent such as thinner, benzene, alcohol or gasoline.
- For genuine leather seats, use a genuine leather seat cleaner.

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [DISPLAY AUDIO WITHOUT BOSE]
PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000014844256
B
The actual shape of the tools may differ from those illustrated here.
Tool number Description
(TechMate No.) C
Tool name
— Removing trim components
(J-46534) D
Trim Tool Set
AWJIA0483ZZ
F
Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000014844257
G
Tool name Description
Power tool Loosening nuts, screws and bolts
PIIB1407E
AV

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [DISPLAY AUDIO WITHOUT BOSE]
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000015258242
ALNIA2037ZZ
No. Component Function

Antenna base (antenna amp., satellite and
1. Refer to AV-16, "Antenna and Antenna Feeder".
AM/FM antennas)
2. Microphone Refer to AV-16, "Microphone".
3. Rear door speaker RH Refer to AV-15, "Speakers".
4. Audio unit Refer to AV-15, "Audio Unit".
5. Front tweeter RH
Refer to AV-15, "Speakers".
6. Front door speaker RH
7. USB interface and AUX in jack Refer to AV-16, "USB Interface and AUX in Jack".
8. Front tweeter LH Refer to AV-15, "Speakers".
9. Combination meter Refer to AV-16, "Combination Meter".
10. Front door speaker LH Refer to AV-15, "Speakers".
11. Steering switches Refer to AV-16, "Steering Switches".
12. Rear door speaker LH Refer to AV-15, "Speakers".

COMPONENT PARTS
Audio Unit INFOID:0000000015258243
A
• AM/FM electronic tuner radio, CD drive and camera controller are
integrated into the audio unit.
• The display can show audio status and rear view monitor images. B
• Music files stored in iPod®*/USB memory can be played using the
separate USB connector.
• Music files stored in an external audio device can be played using
the separate AUX in jack. C
*: iPod® is a registered trademark of Apple, Inc. All rights reserved.
D
ALNIA1592ZZ
Speakers INFOID:0000000015258244
E
FRONT TWEETER
• 2.5 cm (1 in) tweeters are installed in the top front corners of the
instrument panel. F
• Sound signals are input from the audio unit to output high range
sounds.
G
ALNIA1593ZZ
I
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
• 16.5 cm (6.5 in) speakers are installed in the bottom of the front
doors. J
• Sound signals are input from the audio unit to output low range
sounds.
JPNIA1454ZZ
REAR DOOR SPEAKER M

• 16.5 cm (6.5 in) speakers are installed in the bottom of the rear
doors.
• Sound signals are input from the audio unit to output high, mid and AV
low range sounds.
P
JPNIA1454ZZ

COMPONENT PARTS
USB Interface and AUX in Jack INFOID:0000000015258245
• USB Interface and AUX in jack is installed in the console.

• iPod® and USB memory can be connected to the audio unit
through the USB interface.
• An external audio device can be connected to the audio unit
through the AUX in jack.
ALNIA1841ZZ
Steering Switches INFOID:0000000015258246
• Steering switches are installed in the steering wheel.

• Operations for audio and hands-free phone are possible.
• Switches are connected to the combination meter.
• Combination meter is connected to the audio unit via AV communi-
cation.
ALNIA2039ZZ
Microphone INFOID:0000000015258247
• The microphone is installed in the roof in the map lamp assembly.

• Power is supplied from the audio unit.
ALNIA2040ZZ
Combination Meter INFOID:0000000015258248
• Combination meter sends the speed signal to the audio unit.

• Steering switches are connected to the combination meter.
• Combination meter sends the steering switch signals to the audio
unit via AV communication.
ALNIA2041ZZ
Antenna and Antenna Feeder INFOID:0000000015258249
ROOF ANTENNA

COMPONENT PARTS
• AM/FM radio/satellite radio antenna is installed on the rear center
of the roof. A
• It receives radio waves and outputs them to audio unit.
• It receives satellite radio waves and outputs them to audio unit.
• Antenna amp. is integral to the roof antenna.
B
ALNIA2043ZZ
D
• The AM/FM radio antenna has an antenna amp. to obtain sufficient reception power.
I
AWNIA4565GB
ANTENNA FEEDER LAYOUT J
AV

COMPONENT PARTS
ALNIA2042ZZ
1. M503 2. M502 3. M130, M501

4. M129, M500 5. M124 6. M126

SYSTEM
SYSTEM
A
System Description INFOID:0000000015258250
SYSTEM DIAGRAM B
G
AWNIA4581GB
AUDIO SYSTEM
The audio system consists of the following components: H
• Audio unit
• Front tweeters
• Front door speakers I
• Rear door speakers
• USB interface
• AUX in jack
• Steering switches J
• Antenna base (AM/FM antenna, antenna amp. and satellite antenna)
When the audio system is on, AM/FM signals received by the AM/FM antenna are amplified by the antenna
amp. and sent to the audio unit. The audio unit then sends audio signals to the front tweeters, front door K
speakers and rear door speakers.
Refer to Owner's Manual for audio system operating instructions.
HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM L
• Bluetooth® control is built into audio unit.
• The connection between cellular phone and audio unit is performed with Bluetooth® communication.
• The voice guidance signal is input from the audio unit and output to the front speakers when operating the M
cellular phone.
When A Call Is Originated
• Spoken voice sound output from the microphone (microphone signal) is input to audio unit. AV
• Audio unit outputs to cellular phone with Bluetooth® communication as a TEL voice signal.
• Voice sound is then heard at the other party.
O
When Receiving A Call
• Voice sound is input to own cellular phone from the other party.
• TEL voice signal is input to audio unit by establishing Bluetooth® communication from cellular phone, and
P
the signal is output to front speakers.
SPEED SENSITIVE VOLUME SYSTEM
Volume level of this system goes up and down automatically in proportion to the vehicle speed. The control
level can be selected by the customer. Refer to Owner's Manual for operating instructions.

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AUDIO UNIT)
Description INFOID:0000000014844266
The audio unit on board diagnosis performs the functions listed in the table below:
Mode Description
• Audio unit diagnosis.
Self Diagnosis
• Diagnoses the connections across system components.
The following check functions are available: color tone check by color bar
Display Diagnosis
display and white display, light and shade check by gray scale display.
Diagnosis of signals can be performed for vehicle speed, lights, reverse,
Vehicle Signals
EQ pin, destination and camera type.
Speaker Test The connection of a speaker can be confirmed by test tone.
The system malfunction and the frequency when occurring in the past are
Error History displayed. When the malfunctioning item is selected, the time and place
Confirmation/
that the selected malfunction last occurred are displayed.
Adjustment
Camera System Displayed but not used.
The communication condition of each unit of display audio system can be
AV COMM Diagnosis
monitored.
Delete Unit Connection Log Erase the connection history of unit and error history.
Version Information Audio unit software and hardware versions are displayed.
Initialize Setting Initializes the audio unit memory.
On Board Diagnosis Function INFOID:0000000014844267
METHOD OF STARTING
1. Turn the ignition ON.
2. Turn the audio system OFF.
3. While pressing the preset 1 button, turn the volume control dial
clockwise or counterclockwise for 40 clicks or more. Shifting
from current screen to previous screen is performed by pressing
BACK button.
AWNIA4585ZZ
4. The trouble diagnosis initial screen is displayed, and Self Diag-

nosis or Confirmation/Adjustment can be selected.
JSNIA0138GB
SELF DIAGNOSIS MODE

Audio Unit Self Diagnosis
1. Select Self Diagnosis.

2. Self diagnosis screen is displayed. The bar graph visible in center of screen indicates progress of self
diagnosis. A
3. Diagnosis results are displayed after the self diagnosis is com-
pleted. The unit names and the connection lines are color coded
according to the diagnostic results.
B
D
AWNIA2630GB
E
Diagnosis results Unit Connection line
Normal Green Green
Connection malfunction Gray Yellow F
Unit malfunction 1 Red Green
1: Control unit (audio unit) is displayed in red.

G
• Replace audio unit if Self Diagnosis did not run because control unit malfunction is indicated. The symptom is audio unit internal
error. Refer to AV-64, "Removal and Installation".
• If multiple errors occur at the same time for a single unit, the screen switch colors are determined according to the following order
of priority: red > gray. H
4. Comments of self diagnosis results can be viewed in the diagno-
sis result screen.
I
K
JSNIA1870ZZ
Audio Unit Self Diagnosis Results

L
Only Unit Part Is Displayed In Red
Screen switch Description Possible cause
M
• Audio unit power supply or ground cir-
cuits.
Refer to AV-46, "AUDIO UNIT : Diagno-
Malfunction is detected in audio unit power sis Procedure". AV
Control unit
supply and ground circuits. • If no malfunction is detected in audio unit
power supply and ground circuits, re-
place audio unit. Refer to AV-64, "Re-
moval and Installation". O
A Connecting Cable Between Units Is Displayed In Yellow

P
Area with yellow connection lines Description Possible cause
When one of the following is detected: • Combination meter power supply or
• malfunction is detected in combination ground circuits.
meter power supply and ground circuits. Refer to MWI-62, "COMBINATION
Control unit ⇔ Meter
• malfunction is detected in AV communi- METER : Diagnosis Procedure".
cation circuits between audio unit and • AV communication circuits between au-
combination meter. dio unit and combination meter.

Audio Unit Confirmation/Adjustment
1. Select Confirmation/Adjustment.
2. Select each switch on the Confirmation/Adjustment screen to
display the relevant trouble diagnosis screen. Press the BACK
switch to return to the initial Confirmation/Adjustment screen.
AWNIA3343ZZ
Display Diagnosis
AWNIA2632GB
Vehicle Signals
A comparison check can be made of each actual vehicle signal and
the signals recognized by the system.
AWNIA3344ZZ
Speaker Test

Select Speaker Test to display the Speaker Diagnosis screen. Press
Start to generate a test tone in a speaker. Press Start again to gener- A
ate a test tone in the next speaker. Press End to stop the test tones.
AWNIA2634GB
D
Error History
The self diagnosis results are judged depending on whether any error occurs from when Self Diagnosis is
selected until the self diagnosis results are displayed.
However, the diagnosis results are judged normal if an error has occurred before the ignition switch is turned E
ON and then no error has occurred until the self diagnosis start. Check the Error Record to detect any error
that may have occurred before the self diagnosis start because of this situation.
The frequency of occurrence is displayed in a count up manner. The actual count up method differs depending F
on the error item.
Count up method A
• The counter is set to 40 if an error occurs. 1 is subtracted from the counter if the condition is normal at a next G
ignition ON cycle.
• The counter lower limit is 1. The counter can be reset (no error record display) with the Delete log switch.
Count up method B H
• The counter increases by 1 if an error occurs when ignition switch is ON. The counter will not decrease even
if the condition is normal at the next ignition ON cycle.
• The counter upper limit is 50. Any counts exceeding 50 are ignored. The counter can be reset (no error I
record display) with the Delete log switch.
Display type of occurrence

Error history display item J
frequency
Count up method A AV communication line, control unit (AV)
Count up method B Other than the above
K
Error item
Some error items may be displayed simultaneously according to the cause. If some error items are displayed
L
simultaneously, the detection of the cause can be performed by the combination of display items
Error item Description Possible cause

M
Replace the audio unit if the malfunction
AV communication circuit initial diagnosis
CONTROL UNIT (AV) occurs constantly.
malfunction is detected.
Refer to AV-64, "Removal and Installation"
When one of the following is detected: • Combination meter power supply or AV
AV COMM CIRCUIT
cation circuits between audio unit and • AV communication circuits between au- O
Camera System
P

This mode is used to adjust the guide line display position of the rear
view camera.
AWNIA2635GB
AV COMM Diagnosis
• Displays the communication status between audio unit (master
unit) and each unit.
• The error counter displays OK if any malfunction was not detected
in the past and displays 0 if a malfunction is detected. It increases
by 1 if the condition is normal at the next ignition switch ON cycle.
The upper limit of the counter is 39.
• The error counter is erased if Reset is pressed.
Status Counter
Items
(Current) (Past)
AWNIA2636GB
C Rx(Meter-ITM) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
C Tx(ITM-TW SW) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
C Rx(STW SW-ITM) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
NOTE:
“???” indicates UNKWN.
Delete Unit Connection Log
Deletes any unit connection records and error records from the
audio unit memory (clears the records of the unit that has been
removed).
AWNIA2637GB
Version Information
Displays audio unit software and hardware version numbers.
AWNIA3346ZZ
Initialize Settings

Deletes data stored from the audio unit.
A
JSNIA0155GB
AV

AUDIO UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [DISPLAY AUDIO WITHOUT BOSE]
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION

AUDIO UNIT
Reference Value INFOID:0000000014844268
TERMINAL LAYOUT
AWNIA3725ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal
Description Condition
(Wire color) Reference value
Input/ Ignition (Approx.)
+ – Signal name Operation
Output switch
2 3 Sound signal front door

(Y)1 (R)1 speaker and front tweeter Output ON Sound output
(W)2 (P)2 LH
SKIB3609E
4 5 Sound signal rear door

Output ON Sound output
(GR) (BR) speaker LH
SKIB3609E
7
Ground Ignition power supply Input ON — Battery voltage
(LG)
9 8
Illumination control signal Input ON Headlamps ON Battery voltage
(V) (R)
11 12 Sound signal front door

(W)1 (GR)1 speaker and front tweeter Output ON Sound output
(G)2 (V)2 RH
SKIB3609E

AUDIO UNIT
Terminal
(Wire color) Reference value A
Output switch
B
13 14 Sound signal rear door C

(LG) (Y) speaker RH
SKIB3609E D
E
18 When vehicle speed is ap-
Ground Vehicle speed signal Input ON
(G) prox. 40 km/h (25 MPH)
F
JSNIA0012GB
19
Ground Battery power supply Input OFF — Battery voltage G
(L)
20
Ground Ground — ON — 0V
(B)
H
21 Received audio signal I

Ground AUX jack audio signal LH Input ON
(L) (AUX input)
J
SKIB3609E
K
22 Received audio signal
Ground AUX jack audio signal RH Input ON
(G) (AUX input)
L
SKIB3609E
23 M
Ground AUX ground — ON — 0V
(Y)
24
— AUX signal shield — — — —
(Shield)
AV
31
— HF/VR mode change — — — —
(R)
35
Ground ACC power supply Input ON — Battery voltage O
(W)
36 Input/
— AV communication high — — —
(SB) Output
P
37 Input/
— AV communication low — — —
(LG) Output
39 Input/
(SB) Output
40 Input/
(LG) Output

AUDIO UNIT
Terminal
Output switch
41
Ground Camera ground — ON — 0V
(B)
42 Camera image displayed 6.0 V

Ground Camera power supply Output ON
(R) Except for above 0V
43 44
Camera image signal Input ON Camera image displayed
(W) (Shield)
SKIB2251J
45 47 While speaking into micro-

Microphone signal Input ON
(W) (Shield) phone.
SKIB3609E
46
— MIC VCC Input ON — —
(B)
52
Ground Camera detection — ON — 0V
(B)
Selector lever in R (re-
Battery voltage
58 verse)
Ground Reverse signal Input ON
(BR) Selector lever in any posi-
0V
tion other than R (reverse)
61
— V BUS signal — — — —
(R)
62
— USB D− signal — — — —
(W)
63
— USB D+ signal — — — —
(G)
65
— USB ground — — — —
(B)
66
— USB shield — — — —
(Shield)
67 Audio unit ON, FM-AM se-
Ground Antenna amp. ON signal Output ON Battery voltage
(B) lected.
Ground AM/FM antenna signal Input ON 5.0 V
(B) lected.
69
— AM/FM antenna shield — — — —
(Shield)
72 Audio unit ON, XM select-
Ground Satellite antenna signal Input ON 5.0 V
(B) ed.
73
— Satellite antenna shield — — — —
(Shield)
1: With 4 speakers
2
: With 6 speakers

DISPLAY AUDIO WITHOUT BOSE
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [DISPLAY AUDIO WITHOUT BOSE]
WIRING DIAGRAM A
Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000014844269
B
AV
AANWA1812GB

AANWA1813GB

AV
AANWA1814GB

AANIA5746GB

AV
AANIA5747GB

AANIA5748GB

AV
AANIA5749GB

AANIA5750GB

AV
AANIA5751GB

AANIA5752GB

AV
AANIA5753GB

AANIA5754GB

AV
AANIA5755GB

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [DISPLAY AUDIO WITHOUT BOSE]
BASIC INSPECTION
Work Flow INFOID:0000000014844270
OVERALL SEQUENCE
AWNIA2404GB
DETAILED FLOW
1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM
Get detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when the
incident/malfunction occurred).
>> GO TO 2.
2.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer. Verify relation between the symptom and the condition
when the symptom is detected. Refer to AV-59, "Symptom Table".
>> GO TO 3.
3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
Inspect according to Diagnostic Procedure of the system.

Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> GO TO 4. A
NO >> GO TO 2.
4.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART
B
1. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
2. Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnostic Procedure.
C
>> GO TO 5.
5.FINAL CHECK
Refer to confirmed symptom in step 2, and make sure that the symptom is not detected. D
Was the repair confirmed?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO >> GO TO 2. E
AV

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
REGISTRATION (AUDIO UNIT)
REGISTRATION (AUDIO UNIT) : Description INFOID:0000000014844271
AFTER REPLACEMENT
If the audio unit is replaced with a new audio unit, the new audio unit must be registered using the Bluetooth D/
C(serial #).
CAUTION:
If the new audio unit Bluetooth D/C(serial #) is not registered, the “APPS” mode will not function.
REGISTRATION (AUDIO UNIT) : Work Procedure INFOID:0000000014844272
1.RECORD BLUETOOTH D/C(SERIAL #) FOR REPLACEMENT AUDIO UNIT

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn audio unit OFF.
3. Access the diagnostic menu as follows:
- Press and hold preset buttons 2 and 3.
AWNIA3612ZZ
- While holding preset buttons 2 and 3, press preset button 5

three times.
AWNIA3613ZZ
4. Select Version Information from the Diagnostic Menu.
ALNIA1652ZZ

5. Scroll through the menu pages to Bluetooth D/C(serial #) and
record the number displayed. A
ALNIA1653ZZ
>> GO TO 2.
E
2.REGISTER REPLACEMENT AUDIO UNIT
Register the replacement audio unit by contacting NISSAN Owner Services. Refer to TSB.
F
>> GO TO 3.
3.OPERATION CHECK
G
Verify that the audio unit “APPS” function operates normally.
>> Work End. H
AV

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [DISPLAY AUDIO WITHOUT BOSE]
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
AUDIO UNIT
AUDIO UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000014844273
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-29, "Wiring Diagram".
1.CHECK FUSE
Check that the following fuses are not blown:
Terminal No. Signal name Fuse No.

7 Ignition power supply 30 (10A)
19 Battery power supply 16 (20A)
Are the fuses blown?
YES >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect audio unit connector M83.
3. Check voltage between audio unit connector M83 and ground.
Audio unit Voltage

Ground Condition
Connector Terminal (Approx.)
7 Ignition switch: ON
M83 — Battery voltage
19 Ignition switch: OFF
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
3. Check continuity between audio unit connectors and ground.
Audio unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
M83 20
— Yes
M87 52

FRONT TWEETER
FRONT TWEETER
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000014844274
B
C
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
Check the audio unit and speaker connectors for the following:
• Proper connection D
• Damage
• Disconnected or loose terminals
Is the inspection result normal? E
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair the terminals or connectors.
2.CHECK FRONT TWEETER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY F
1. Disconnect audio unit connector M83 and suspect front tweeter connector.
2. Check continuity between audio unit connector M83 and suspect front tweeter connector.
G
Audio unit Front tweeter
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
H
2 1
M80 (LH)
3 2
M83 Yes
11 1 I
M23 (RH)
12 2
3. Check continuity between audio unit connector M83 and ground.
J
Audio unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal K
2
3
M83 — No L
11
12
Is the inspection result normal? M
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK FRONT TWEETER SIGNAL AV
1. Connect audio unit connector M83 and suspect front tweeter connector.
2. Turn ignition switch to ON.
3. Push audio unit POWER switch. O
4. Check signal between the terminals of audio unit connector M83.
Audio unit connector M83 P

(+) (−) Condition Reference value
Terminal Terminal

FRONT TWEETER
2 3
Audio signal output

11 12
SKIB3609E

YES >> Replace front tweeter. Refer to AV-67, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-64, "Removal and Installation".

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
A
B
C
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
• Damage
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FRONT DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY F
1. Disconnect audio unit connector M83 and suspect front door speaker connector.
2. Check continuity between audio unit connector M83 and suspect front door speaker connector.
G
Audio unit Front door speaker
Continuity
H
2 1
D7 (LH)
3 2
M83 Yes
11 1 I
D104 (RH)
12 2
J
Audio unit
Ground Continuity
2
3
M83 — No L
11
12
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK FRONT DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL AV
1. Connect audio unit connector M83 and suspect front door speaker connector.

Terminal Terminal

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
2 3
Audio signal output

11 12
SKIB3609E

YES >> Replace front door speaker. Refer to AV-68, "Removal and Installation".

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
A
B
C
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
• Damage
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK REAR DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY F
1. Disconnect audio unit connector M83 and suspect rear door speaker connector.
2. Check continuity between audio unit connector M83 and suspect rear door speaker connector.
G
Audio unit Rear speaker
Continuity
H
4 1
D203 (LH)
5 2
M83 Yes
13 1 I
D303 (RH)
14 2
J
Audio unit
Ground Continuity
4
5
M83 — No L
13
14
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK REAR DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL AV
1. Connect audio unit connector M83 and suspect rear door speaker connector.

Terminal Terminal

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
4 5
Audio signal output

13 14
SKIB3609E

YES >> Replace rear door speaker. Refer to AV-69, "Removal and Installation".

MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
B
C
1.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN AUDIO UNIT AND MICROPHONE
2. Disconnect audio unit connector M87 and microphone connector R8. D
3. Check continuity between audio unit connector M87 and microphone connector R8.
Audio unit Microphone E

Continuity
45 1
F
M87 46 R8 4 Yes
47 2
4. Check continuity between audio unit connector M87 and ground. G
Audio unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal H
45
M87 — No
46
I
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connectors. J
2.CHECK MICROPHONE POWER SUPPLY
1. Connect audio unit connector M87 and microphone connector R8.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. K
3. Check voltage between microphone connector R8 and ground.
Microphone Ground L
Voltage
(+)
(-) (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M
R8 4 — 5V
YES >> GO TO 3. AV
3.CHECK MICROPHONE SIGNAL
O
Check signal between terminals of audio unit connector M87.

Audio unit connector M87

(+) (-) Condition Reference value
Terminal Terminal
45 47 Speak into microphone.
PKIB5037J

YES >> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-64, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace microphone. Refer to AV-71, "Removal and Installation".

STEERING SWITCH
STEERING SWITCH
A
B
1.CHECK STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH RESISTANCE

D
2. Disconnect combination switch connector M90.
3. Check resistance between the terminals of combination switch connector M90.
E
Combination switch connector M88 Resistance Ω
Condition
Terminal Terminal (Approx.)
F
Depress SOURCE switch. 1
Depress switch. 121
321 G
25 Depress switch.
Depress switch. 723
Depress ENTER switch. 2023 H

19
Depress switch. 1
Depress switch. 121 I

18 321
Depress switch.
Depress switch. 723 J

Depress DISPLAY switch. 2023
K
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace steering switches. Refer to AV-65, "Removal and Installation".
2.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN COMBINATION METER AND COMBINATION SWITCH L
1. Disconnect combination meter connector M76 and combination switch connector M30.
2. Check continuity between combination meter connector M76 and combination switch connector M30.
M
Combination meter Combination switch
Continuity
AV
22 8
M76 23 M30 15 Yes
21 14 O
3. Check continuity between combination meter connector M76 and ground.
Combination meter P
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
22
M76 23 — No
21

STEERING SWITCH
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH
Check continuity between combination switch connectors M90 and M30.
Combination switch
Continuity
25 8
M90 18 M30 15 Yes
19 14
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace spiral cable. Refer to SR-16, "Removal and Installation".
4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN COMBINATION METER AND AUDIO UNIT
1. Disconnect combination meter connector M77 and audio unit connector M87.
2. Check continuity between combination meter connector M77 and audio unit connector M87.
Combination meter Audio unit

Continuity
47 36
M77 M87 Yes
48 37
Combination meter
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
47
M77 — No
48

USB CONNECTOR
USB CONNECTOR
A
B
C
1.CHECK USB INTERFACE HARNESS CONTINUITY
2. Disconnect audio unit connector M121 and USB interface connector M89. D
3. Check continuity between audio unit connector M121 and USB interface connector M89.
Audio unit USB interface E

Continuity
61 1
62 2
F
M121 63 M89 3 Yes

65 5 G
66 6
H
Audio unit
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
I
61
M121 Ground No
63
Is the inspection result normal? J
YES >> Replace the USB interface. Refer to AV-70, "Removal and Installation".
K
AV

AUXILIARY INPUT JACK
1.CHECK AUX JACK HARNESS CONTINUITY

2. Disconnect audio control unit connector M88 and AUX in jack connector M104.
3. Check continuity between audio control unit connector M88 and AUX in jack connector M104.
Audio control unit AUX in jack

Continuity
21 1
M88 22 M104 4 Yes
23 3
4. Check continuity between audio control unit connector M88 and ground.
Audio control unit

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
21
M88 Ground No
22
YES >> Replace the AUX in jack. Refer to AV-70, "Removal and Installation".

AUDIO SYSTEM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [DISPLAY AUDIO WITHOUT BOSE]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
AUDIO SYSTEM
Symptom Table INFOID:0000000014844281
B
RELATED TO AUDIO
C
Symptoms Check items Probable malfunction location
Malfunction in audio unit.
The disk cannot be removed. Audio unit Refer to AV-20, "On Board Diagnosis Func-
D
tion".
• Speaker circuit shorted to ground.
Refer to AV-29, "Wiring Diagram".
• Audio unit power supply and ground cir- E
No sound from all speakers.
cuits malfunction.
sis Procedure".
F
• Poor connector connection of speaker.
• Sound signal circuit malfunction between
audio unit and speaker.
Refer to: G
- AV-47, "Diagnosis Procedure" (front
tweeter).
No sound comes out or the level of the - AV-49, "Diagnosis Procedure" (front door
speaker). H
sound is low.
Only a certain speaker (front tweeter LH, - AV-51, "Diagnosis Procedure" (rear door
front tweeter RH, front door speaker LH, speaker).
front door speaker RH, rear door speaker • Malfunction in speaker.
I
LH, rear door speaker RH) does not output Refer to:
sound. - AV-67, "Removal and Installation" (front
tweeter).
- AV-68, "Removal and Installation" (front J
door speaker).
- AV-69, "Removal and Installation" (rear
door speaker).
• Malfunction in audio unit. K
Refer to AV-20, "On Board Diagnosis
Function".
AV

AUDIO SYSTEM
Noise comes out from all speakers. Refer to AV-20, "On Board Diagnosis Func-
tion".
audio unit and speaker.
Refer to:
tweeter).
- AV-49, "Diagnosis Procedure" (front door
speaker).
- AV-51, "Diagnosis Procedure" (rear door
Noise comes out only from a certain speak- speaker).
er (front tweeter LH, front tweeter RH, front • Malfunction in speaker.
door speaker LH, front door speaker RH, • Poor Installation of speaker (e.g. back-
Noise is mixed with audio.
rear door speaker LH, rear door speaker lash and looseness).
RH). Refer to:
- AV-67, "Removal and Installation" (front
tweeter).
door speaker).
door speaker).
• Malfunction in audio unit.
Function".
Poor connector connection of antenna or
Noise is mixed with radio only (when the ve-
antenna feeder.
hicle hits a bump or while driving over bad
Refer to AV-16, "Antenna and Antenna
roads)
Feeder".
• Antenna amp. ON signal circuit malfunc-
• Other audio sounds are normal.
tion.
• Any radio station cannot be received or
Refer to AV-26, "Reference Value".
poor reception is caused even after mov-
No radio reception or poor reception. • Poor connector connection of antenna or
ing to a service area with good reception
antenna feeder.
(e.g. a place with clear view and no ob-
stacles generating external noises).
Feeder".
• Poor continuity in antenna feeder.
• Poor connector connection of antenna or
antenna feeder.
No satellite radio reception. Satellite radio antenna malfunction. • Loose satellite radio antenna mounting
nut.
Feeder".
The majority of buzz/rattle sounds are not
Refer to "SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROU-
indicative of an issue with the speaker, usu-
Buzz/rattle sound from speaker BLE DIAGNOSIS" in the appropriate interi-
ally something nearby the speaker is caus-
or trim section.
ing the buzz/rattle.
RELATED TO HANDS-FREE PHONE

• Before performing diagnosis, confirm that the cellular phone being used by the customer is compatible with
the vehicle.
• It is possible that a malfunction is occurring due to a version change of the phone even though the phone is
a compatible type. This can be confirmed by changing the cellular phone to another compatible type, and
check that it operates normally. It is important to determine whether the cause of the malfunction is the vehi-
cle or the cellular phone.
Check Compatibility
1. Make sure the customer’s Bluetooth® related concern is understood.
2. Verify the customer’s concern.
NOTE:

AUDIO SYSTEM
The customer’s phone may be required, depending upon their concern.
3. Write down the customer’s phone brand, model and service provider. A
NOTE:
It is necessary to know the service provider. On occasion, a given phone may be on the approved list with
one provider, but may not be on the approved list with other providers. B
4. Go to “www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth/”.
a. Using the website’s search engine, find out if the customer’s phone is on the approved list.
b. If the customer’s phone is NOT on the approved list: C
Stop diagnosis here. The customer needs to obtain a Bluetooth® phone that is on the approved list before
any further action.
c. If the feature related to the customer’s concern shows as “N” (not compatible): D
Stop diagnosis here. If the customer still wants the feature to function, they will need to get an approved
phone showing the feature as “Y” (compatible) in the “Basic Features”.
d. If the feature related to the customer’s concern shows as “Y” (compatible): E
Perform diagnosis as per the following table.

F
Does not recognize cellular phone connec-
tion (no connection is displayed on the dis- Repeat the registration of cellular phone.
play at the guide).
G
• Hands-free phone operation can be
made, but the communication cannot be
established. Malfunction in audio unit.
Hands-free phone cannot be established. • Hands-free phone operation can be per- Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-64, "Re- H
formed, however, voice between each moval and Installation".
other cannot be heard during the conver-
sation.
I
The other party’s voice cannot be heard by Check the “microphone speaker” in Inspec-
hands-free phone. tion & Adjustment Mode if sound is heard.
Originating sound is not heard by the other Sound operation function is normal.
J
party with hands-free phone communica- Microphone signal circuit malfunction.
tion. Sound operation function does not work.
Refer to AV-53, "Diagnosis Procedure".
• The voice recognition can be controlled.
Steering switch malfunction. K
• Steering switches , , and Replace steering switch. Refer to AV-65,
"Removal and Installation".
work, but does not work.
The system cannot be operated. L
Steering switches , , , Steering switch signal circuit malfunction.
and do not work.
Steering switch ground circuit malfunction. M
All steering switches do not work.
AV

NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
RELATED TO NOISE
The majority of the audio concerns are the result of outside causes (bad CD, electromagnetic interference,
etc.).
The following noise results from variations in field strength, such as fading noise and multi-path noise, or
external noise from trains and other sources. It is not a malfunction.
• Fading noise: This noise occurs because of variations in the field strength in a narrow range due to moun-
tains or buildings blocking the signal.
• Multi-path noise: This noise results from the waves sent directly from the broadcast station arriving at the
antenna at a different time from the waves which reflect off mountains or buildings.
The vehicle itself can be a source of noise if noise prevention parts or electrical equipment is malfunctioning.
Check if noise is caused and/or changed by engine speed, ignition switch turned to each position, and opera-
tion of each piece of electrical equipment, and determine the cause.
NOTE:
The source of the noise can be found easily by listening to the noise while removing the fuses of electrical
components, one by one.
Type of Noise and Possible Cause
Occurrence condition Possible cause

A continuous growling noise occurs. The speed of
Occurs only when engine is ON. • Ignition components
the noise varies with changes in the engine speed.
The occurrence of the noise is linked with the operation of the fuel pump. • Fuel pump condenser
A cracking or snapping sound occurs with the op-
Noise only occurs when various • Relay malfunction, audio unit malfunction
eration of various switches.
electrical components are oper-
ating. The noise occurs when various motors are operat- • Motor case ground
ing. • Motor
• Rear defogger coil malfunction
The noise occurs constantly, not just under certain conditions. • Open circuit in printed heater
• Poor ground of antenna feeder line
• Ground wire of body parts
A cracking or snapping sound occurs while the vehicle is being driven, especially when
• Ground due to improper part installation
it is vibrating excessively.
• Wiring connections or a short circuit
Symptom Cause and Counter measure
Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones may not be recognized

Does not recognize cellular phone connection (No connection is by the in-vehicle phone module.
displayed on the display at the guide). Refer to “RELATED TO HANDS-FREE PHONE (Check Compati-
bility)” in AV-59, "Symptom Table".
Customer will not be able to use a hands-free phone under the fol-
lowing conditions:
• The vehicle is outside of the telephone service area.
• The vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive radio
waves; such as in a tunnel, in an underground parking garage,
near a tall building or in a mountainous area.
Cannot use hands-free phone. • The cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed.
NOTE:
While a cellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth® wire-
less connection, the battery power of the cellular phone may dis-
charge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System cannot charge cellular phones.

A
When the radio wave condition is not ideal or ambient sound is too
The other party’s voice cannot be heard by hands-free phone. loud, it may be difficult to hear the other person’s voice during a
call.
Do not place the cellular phone in an area surrounded by metal or B
Poor sound quality. far away from the in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality
degradation and wireless connection disruption.
C
AV

AUDIO UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [DISPLAY AUDIO WITHOUT BOSE]
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

AUDIO UNIT
Exploded View INFOID:0000000014844283
AWNIA3340ZZ
1. Audio unit bracket (LH) 2. Audio unit 3. Audio unit bracket (RH)
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000014844284
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Refer to PG-129, "Removal and Installation (Battery)".
2. Remove cluster lid C. Refer to IP-21, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove instrument finisher B. Refer to IP-16, "INSTRUMENT FINISHER B : Removal and Installation".
4. Remove instrument finisher E. Refer to IP-16, "INSTRUMENT FINISHER E : Removal and Installation".
5. Remove the audio unit screws, then pull out the audio unit.
6. Disconnect the harness connectors from the audio unit and remove.
7. Remove the audio unit bracket (LH/RH) screws and the audio unit brackets (LH/RH) (if necessary).
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
When replacing audio unit, the audio unit must be registered. Refer to AV-44, "REGISTRATION (AUDIO
UNIT) : Description".

STEERING SWITCHES
STEERING SWITCHES
A
I
ALOIA0584ZZ
1. Steering wheel 2. Steering wheel finisher 3. Steering switches J
K
REMOVAL
NOTE:
The steering switches are serviced as an assembly.
L
1. Remove driver airbag. Refer to SR-12, "Removal and Installation".
2. Release pawls on the steering wheel front finisher (1) using suit-
able tool and remove from the steering wheel.
M
: Pawl
AV
ALOIA0575ZZ

STEERING SWITCHES
3. Release pawls on the steering switches (1) using suitable tool
and remove from the steering wheel.
: Pawl
ALOIA0576ZZ
4. Disconnect the harness connector from the steering switches and remove steering switches.
INSTALLATION

FRONT TWEETER
FRONT TWEETER
A
REMOVAL B
1. Remove defroster grille. Refer to VTL-13, "DEFROSTER GRILLE : Removal and Installation".
2. Release pawls and pull out the front tweeter (1) from the instru-
ment panel assembly (2). C
: Pawl
: Front
3. Disconnect the harness connector from the front tweeter and D
remove.
ALNIA1663ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
G
AV

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
ALNIA1580ZZ
1. Front door speaker
REMOVAL
1. Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-15, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove front door speaker bolts, then pull out front door speaker.
3. Disconnect the harness connector from front door speaker and remove.
INSTALLATION

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
A
I
ALNIA1581ZZ
1. Rear door speaker J
K
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear door finisher. Refer to INT-18, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove rear door speaker bolts, then pull out rear door speaker. L
3. Disconnect the harness connector from the rear door speaker and remove.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. M
AV

USB INTERFACE AND AUX IN JACK
REMOVAL
2. Release the pawls (A) on the back of USB interface and AUX in
jack (2), then remove from the front of cluster lid C (1).
ALNIA1582ZZ
INSTALLATION

MICROPHONE
MICROPHONE
A
REMOVAL B
1. Remove the map lamp assembly. Refer to INL-52, "Removal and Installation".
2. Release harness connector (A) by sliding rearward to remove
from the pawl (B). C
3. Release pawls (C) and remove the microphone (1) from the
front room/map lamp assembly.
D
ALNIA1583ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
G
AV

ANTENNA BASE
ANTENNA BASE
AWNIA4563ZZ
1. Outer cover 2. Antenna base A. Antenna nut
REMOVAL
1. Using a suitable tool, remove the outer cover.
2. Remove the luggage side upper finisher (RH). Refer to INT-33, "LUGGAGE SIDE UPPER FINISHER :
Removal and Installation".
3. Partially lower headlining (rear). Refer to INT-29, "Removal and Installation".
4. Disconnect harness connectors from antenna feeder.
5. Remove nut from antenna base and remove.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
If the antenna base nut is not properly tightened, lower sensitivity of the antenna may be experienced.
If the nut is over tightened, this will deform the roof panel.
Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000014894942
DISASSEMBLY
Remove the inner cover screws (A), then remove the inner cover (1)
from antenna base (2).
AWNIA4564ZZ
ASSEMBLY
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [DISPLAY AUDIO WITH BOSE]
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: D
see the SR section.
F
ness connectors.
G
WARNING:
J
must be within 110 mm (4.33 in).] K
PKIA0306E
AV
twisted line will be lost.) O
PKIA0307E

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [DISPLAY AUDIO WITH BOSE]
- Oily dirt:
area.

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [DISPLAY AUDIO WITH BOSE]
PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
B
(TechMate No.) C
Tool name
(J-46534) D
Trim Tool Set
AWJIA0483ZZ
F
G
PIIB1407E
AV

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [DISPLAY AUDIO WITH BOSE]
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
ALNIA2038ZZ

AM/FM antenna)
2. Subwoofer
3. Rear door speaker RH
4. BOSE® speaker amp. Refer to AV-77, "BOSE Speaker Amp.".
6. Front tweeter RH
7. USB interface and AUX in jack Refer to AV-79, "USB Interface and AUX in Jack".
9. Center speaker
11. Front tweeter LH

COMPONENT PARTS
A
15. Microphone Refer to AV-79, "Microphone". B
• AM/FM electronic tuner radio, CD drive and camera controller are C

integrated into the audio unit.
• The display can show audio status and rear view monitor images.
• Music files stored in iPod®*/USB memory can be played using the D
separate USB connector.
the separate AUX in jack.
E
*: iPod® is a registered trademark of Apple, Inc. All rights reserved.
ALNIA1592ZZ F
BOSE Speaker Amp. INFOID:0000000015258329
• Installed under the rear of the front passenger seat. G

• Receives sound signal from AV control unit, and outputs sound sig-
nal to each tweeter, speaker and the subwoofer.
H
J
ALNIA1596ZZ
K
FRONT TWEETER
instrument panel. L
• Sound signals are input from the Bose speaker amp. to output high
range sounds.
AV
ALNIA1586ZZ
CENTER SPEAKER O

COMPONENT PARTS
• 7.6 cm (3 in) speaker is installed in the top center of the instrument
panel.
• Sound signals are input from the Bose speaker amp. to output mid
range sounds.
ALNIA1588ZZ
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER

doors.
• Sound signals are input from the Bose speaker amp. to output low
range sounds.
ALNIA1587ZZ
REAR DOOR SPEAKER

• 12.7 cm (5 in) speakers are installed in the bottom of the rear
doors.
• Sound signals are input from the Bose speaker amp. to output
high, mid and low range sounds.
ALNIA1589ZZ
SUBWOOFER
• Installed on top of the spare tire underneath the spare tire cover.
range sounds.
ALNIA1597ZZ

COMPONENT PARTS
USB Interface and AUX in Jack INFOID:0000000015258331
A
• iPod® and USB memory can be connected to the audio unit
through the USB interface. B
• An external audio device can be connected to the audio unit
C
D
ALNIA1841ZZ

E
• Switches are connected to the combination meter. F
• Combination meter is connected to the audio unit via AV communi-
cation.
G
H
ALNIA2039ZZ
I
• Power is supplied from the audio unit.
J
ALNIA2040ZZ
Combination Meter INFOID:0000000015258334 M

• Combination meter sends the steering switch signals to the audio AV
ALNIA2041ZZ
ROOF ANTENNA

COMPONENT PARTS
of the roof.
• It receives radio waves and outputs them to audio unit.
• It receives satellite radio waves and outputs them to audio unit.
ALNIA2043ZZ
AWNIA4565GB
ANTENNA FEEDER LAYOUT

COMPONENT PARTS
ALNIA2042ZZ
K
1. M503 2. M502 3. M130, M501

4. M129, M500 5. M124 6. M126 L
AV

SYSTEM
SYSTEM
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
AWNIA4582GB
AUDIO SYSTEM
The audio system consists of the following components:
• Audio unit
• Bose speaker amp.
• Front tweeters
• Center speaker
• Front door speakers
• Subwoofer
• USB interface
• AUX in jack
• Steering switches
amp. and sent to the audio unit. The audio unit then sends audio signals to the Bose speaker amp. The Bose
speaker amp. then sends the audio signals to the tweeters, speakers and subwoofer.
HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM
• Bluetooth® control is built into audio unit.
• The connection between cellular phone and audio unit is performed with Bluetooth® communication.
• The voice guidance signal is input from the audio unit and output to the front speakers when operating the
cellular phone.
• Spoken voice sound output from the microphone (microphone signal) is input to audio unit.
• Audio unit outputs to cellular phone with Bluetooth® communication as a TEL voice signal.
• TEL voice signal is input to audio unit by establishing Bluetooth® communication from cellular phone, and
the signal is output to front speakers.
Volume level of this system goes up and down automatically in proportion to the vehicle speed. The control
level can be selected by the customer. Refer to Owner's Manual for operating instructions.

A
The audio unit on board diagnosis performs the functions listed in the table below: B
Mode Description
• Audio unit diagnosis. C
Self Diagnosis
Display Diagnosis
D
Vehicle Signals
E
Confirmation/
Adjustment F
AV COMM Diagnosis
monitored.
G
Initialize Setting Initializes the audio unit memory. H
I
METHOD OF STARTING
J
BACK button. K
M
AWNIA4585ZZ
4. The trouble diagnosis initial screen is displayed, and Self Diag- AV

JSNIA0138GB
SELF DIAGNOSIS MODE


diagnosis.
AWNIA2630GB

Normal Green Green
Connection malfunction Gray Yellow

of priority: red > gray.
sis result screen.
JSNIA1870ZZ

cuits.
Malfunction is detected in audio unit power sis Procedure".
Control unit
moval and Installation".


1. Select Confirmation/Adjustment. A
B
AWNIA3343ZZ
H
Display Diagnosis
AWNIA2632GB
Vehicle Signals AV
O
AWNIA3344ZZ
Speaker Test

Start to generate a test tone in a speaker. Press Start again to gener-
AWNIA2634GB
Error History
However, the diagnosis results are judged normal if an error has occurred before the ignition switch is turned
The frequency of occurrence is displayed in a count up manner. The actual count up method differs depending
on the error item.
Count up method A
• The counter is set to 40 if an error occurs. 1 is subtracted from the counter if the condition is normal at a next
ignition ON cycle.
Count up method B
• The counter upper limit is 50. Any counts exceeding 50 are ignored. The counter can be reset (no error

Error history display item
frequency
Error item

AV COMM CIRCUIT
Camera System

view camera. A
AWNIA2635GB
D
AV COMM Diagnosis
• The error counter displays OK if any malfunction was not detected E
The upper limit of the counter is 39. F
Status Counter
Items G
(Current) (Past)
AWNIA2636GB
C Tx(ITM-TW SW) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39 H
NOTE:
“???” indicates UNKWN. I
audio unit memory (clears the records of the unit that has been J
removed).
AWNIA2637GB
M
Version Information
AV
AWNIA3346ZZ
Initialize Settings

JSNIA0155GB

AUDIO UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [DISPLAY AUDIO WITH BOSE]
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION A

AUDIO UNIT
B
TERMINAL LAYOUT
C
AWNIA3725ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES F
Terminal
(Wire color) Reference value G
Output switch
1
Ground BOSE amp. ON signal Output ON — Battery voltage
H
(BR)
I
2 3 Pre-amp sound signal front
(R) (G) LH
J
SKIB3609E
4 5 Pre-amp sound signal rear L

(V) (LG) LH
SKIB3609E M
7
(LG)
9 8 AV
Illumination control signal Input ON Headlamps ON Battery voltage
(V) (R)
10 Pre-amp sound signal
— — — — —
(B) shield O
P
(R) (W) RH
SKIB3609E

AUDIO UNIT
Terminal
Output switch
13 14 Pre-amp sound signal rear

(L) (Y) RH
SKIB3609E

JSNIA0012GB
19
Ground Battery power supply Input OFF — Battery voltage
(L)
20
(B)

(L) (AUX input)
SKIB3609E

(G) (AUX input)
SKIB3609E
23
(Y)
24
(Shield)
31
— HF/VR mode change — — — —
(R)
35
Ground ACC power supply Input ON — Battery voltage
(W)
36 Input/
(SB) Output
37 Input/
(LG) Output
39 Input/
(SB) Output
40 Input/
(LG) Output

AUDIO UNIT
Terminal
Output switch
41 B
Ground Camera ground — ON — 0V
(B)
42 Camera image displayed 6.0 V

Ground Camera power supply Output ON C
(R) Except for above 0V
D
43 44
Camera image signal Input ON Camera image displayed
(W) (Shield)
E
SKIB2251J

(W) (Shield) phone. G
SKIB3609E
H
46
(B)
52 I
Ground Camera detection — ON — 0V
(B)
Battery voltage
58 verse)
Ground Reverse signal Input ON J
0V
61
— V BUS signal — — — — K
(R)
62
(W)
L
63
— USB D+ signal — — — —
(G)
65
(B)
— USB ground — — — — M
66
(Shield)
AV
(B) lected.
Ground AM/FM antenna signal Input ON 5.0 V O
(B) lected.
69
— AM/FM antenna shield — — — —
(Shield)
72 Audio unit ON, XM select-
P
(B) ed.
73
(Shield)

BOSE SPEAKER AMP
BOSE SPEAKER AMP
TERMINAL LAYOUT
ALNIA1599ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal
(wire color) Reference value
Output switch
1 10 Subwoofer speaker signal

(SB) (V) 1
SKIB3609E

(GR) (Y) 2
SKIB3609E
4 5 Front door speaker and

(BR) (P) front tweeter signal LH
SKIA0177E
6 7 Rear door speaker signal

(LG) (V) LH
SKIA0177E

BOSE SPEAKER AMP
Terminal
(wire color) Reference value A
Output switch
B
8 13 Front door speaker and C

(G) (R) front tweeter signal RH
SKIA0177E D
11
Ground Battery power supply Input – – Battery voltage
(W)
12
E
Ground Ground – ON – 0V
(B)
15 28
Center speaker signal Output ON Sound output
(V) (BG)
G
SKIA0177E
H
18 32 I
Sound signal front LH Input ON Sound output
(R) (G)
J
SKIA0177E
K
19 20
Sound signal front RH Input ON Sound output
(Y) (L)
L
SKIA0177E
21 22
Sound signal rear LH Input ON Sound output AV
(V) (LG)
SKIA0177E
O
P
23 33
Sound signal rear RH Input ON Sound output
(W) (R)
SKIA0177E

BOSE SPEAKER AMP
Terminal
Output switch
31
Ground Amp. ON signal Input ON – Greater than 6.5V
(BR)

(LG) (V) RH
SKIA0177E

< WIRING DIAGRAM > [DISPLAY AUDIO WITH BOSE]
WIRING DIAGRAM A
B
AV
AANWA1807GB

AANWA1808GB

AV
AANWA1809GB

AANWA1810GB

AV
AANIA5733GB

AANIA5734GB

AV
AANIA5735GB

AANIA5736GB

AV
AANIA5737GB

AANIA5738GB

AV
AANIA5739GB

AANIA5740GB

AV
AANIA5741GB

AANIA5742GB

AV
AANIA5743GB

< BASIC INSPECTION > [DISPLAY AUDIO WITH BOSE]
BASIC INSPECTION
OVERALL SEQUENCE
AWNIA2404GB
DETAILED FLOW
1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM
>> GO TO 2.
2.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
when the symptom is detected. Refer to AV-137, "Symptom Table".
>> GO TO 3.
3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
Inspect according to Diagnostic Procedure of the system.

Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> GO TO 4. A
NO >> GO TO 2.
4.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART
B
1. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
2. Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnostic Procedure.
C
>> GO TO 5.
5.FINAL CHECK
Refer to confirmed symptom in step 2, and make sure that the symptom is not detected. D
Was the repair confirmed?
NO >> GO TO 2. E
AV

REGISTRATION (AUDIO UNIT)
REGISTRATION (AUDIO UNIT) : Description INFOID:0000000014844316
AFTER REPLACEMENT
If the audio unit is replaced with a new audio unit, the new audio unit must be registered using the Bluetooth D/
C(serial #).
CAUTION:
If the new audio unit Bluetooth D/C(serial #) is not registered, the “APPS” mode will not function.
REGISTRATION (AUDIO UNIT) : Work Procedure INFOID:0000000014844317
1.RECORD BLUETOOTH D/C(SERIAL #) FOR REPLACEMENT AUDIO UNIT

2. Turn audio unit OFF.
3. Access the diagnostic menu as follows:
- Press and hold preset buttons 2 and 3.
AWNIA3612ZZ
- While holding preset buttons 2 and 3, press preset button 5

three times.
AWNIA3613ZZ
4. Select Version Information from the Diagnostic Menu.
ALNIA1652ZZ

5. Scroll through the menu pages to Bluetooth D/C(serial #) and
record the number displayed. A
ALNIA1653ZZ
>> GO TO 2.
E
2.REGISTER REPLACEMENT AUDIO UNIT
Register the replacement audio unit by contacting NISSAN Owner Services. Refer to TSB.
F
>> GO TO 3.
3.OPERATION CHECK
G
Verify that the audio unit “APPS” function operates normally.
>> Work End. H
AV

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [DISPLAY AUDIO WITH BOSE]
AUDIO UNIT
1.CHECK FUSE

NO >> GO TO 2.
Audio unit Voltage

Ground Condition
YES >> GO TO 3.
3. Check continuity between audio unit connectors and ground.
Audio unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
M83 20
— Yes
M87 52
BOSE SPEAKER AMP
BOSE SPEAKER AMP : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000015258340

1.CHECK FUSE A

B
YES >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit. C
NO >> GO TO 2.
D
2. Disconnect Bose speaker amp. connector B137.
3. Check voltage between Bose speaker amp. connector B137 and ground.
E
Bose speaker amp. Voltage
Ground Condition
F
B137 11 — Ignition switch: OFF Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 3. G
Check continuity between Bose speaker amp. connector B137 and ground. H
Bose speaker amp.

Ground Continuity I
Connector Terminal
B137 12 — Yes
K
AV

FRONT TWEETER
FRONT TWEETER
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
Check the audio unit, Bose speaker amp. and speaker connectors for the following:
• Proper connection
• Damage
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FRONT TWEETER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY (BOSE SPEAKER AMP.)
1. Disconnect Bose speaker amp. connector B137 and suspect front tweeter connector.
2. Check continuity between Bose speaker amp. connector B137 and suspect front tweeter connector.
Bose speaker amp. Front tweeter

Continuity
4 1
M80 (LH)
5 2
B137 Yes
8 1
M23 (RH)
13 2
3. Check continuity between Bose speaker amp. connector B137 and ground.
Bose speaker amp.

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
4
5
B137 — No
8
13
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK FRONT TWEETER SIGNAL (BOSE SPEAKER AMP.)
1. Connect Bose speaker amp. connector B137 and suspect front tweeter connector.
3. Push audio unit POWER switch.
4. Check signal between the terminals of Bose speaker amp. connectors.
Bose speaker amp. connector B137

Terminal Terminal

FRONT TWEETER
4 5
A
Audio signal output

8 13 B
SKIB3609E
C
NO >> GO TO 4.
D
4.CHECK FRONT TWEETER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY (AUDIO UNIT)
1. Turn ignition switch to OFF.
2. Disconnect Bose speaker amp. connector B138 and audio unit connector M83. E
3. Check continuity between Bose speaker amp. connector B138 and audio unit connector M83.
Bose speaker amp. Audio unit F

Continuity
18 2
G
32 3
B138 M83 Yes
19 11
20 12 H
Bose speaker amp. I

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
18
J
32
B138 — No
19
20 K
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. L
5.CHECK FRONT TWEETER SIGNAL (AUDIO UNIT)

1. Connect Bose speaker amp. connector B138 and audio unit connector M83. M
4. Check signal between audio unit connector M83 and ground.
AV

(+) (−) Condition Reference value O
Terminal Terminal
2 3
P
Audio signal output

11 12
SKIB3609E

FRONT TWEETER
YES >> Replace Bose speaker amp. Refer to AV-147, "Removal and Installation".

CENTER SPEAKER
CENTER SPEAKER
A
B
C
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
• Damage
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK CENTER SPEAKER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY (BOSE SPEAKER AMP.) F
1. Disconnect Bose speaker amp. connector B138 and center speaker connector M70.
2. Check continuity between Bose speaker amp. connector B138 and center speaker connector M70.
G
Bose speaker amp. Center speaker
Continuity
H
15 1
B138 M70 Yes
28 2
3. Check continuity between Bose speaker amp. connector B138 and ground. I
Bose speaker amp.

Ground Continuity J
Connector Terminal
15
B138 — No
28 K
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK CENTER SPEAKER SIGNAL (BOSE SPEAKER AMP.)
1. Connect Bose speaker amp. connector B138 and center speaker connector M70.
M
4. Check signal between Bose speaker amp. connector B138 and ground.
AV
O
Terminal Terminal
15 28 Audio signal output
SKIB3609E

CENTER SPEAKER
YES >> Replace center speaker. Refer to AV-150, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK CENTER SPEAKER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY (AUDIO UNIT)
2. Disconnect Bose speaker amp. connector B138 and audio unit connector M83.
Bose speaker amp. Audio unit

Continuity
18 2
32 3
B138 M83 Yes
19 11
20 12
Bose speaker amp.

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
18
32
B138 — No
19
20
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK CENTER SPEAKER SIGNAL (AUDIO UNIT)
1. Connect Bose speaker amp. connector B138 and audio unit connector M83.

Terminal Terminal
2 3
Audio signal output

11 12
SKIB3609E


FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
A
B
C
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
• Damage
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FRONT DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY (BOSE SPEAKER AMP.) F
1. Disconnect Bose speaker amp. connector B137 and suspect front door speaker connector.
2. Check continuity between Bose speaker amp. connector B137 and suspect front door speaker connector.
G
Bose speaker amp. Front door speaker
Continuity
H
4 1
D9 (LH)
5 2
B137 Yes
8 1 I
D114 (RH)
13 2
J
Bose speaker amp.

Ground Continuity
4
5
B137 — No L
8
13
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK FRONT DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL (BOSE SPEAKER AMP.) AV
1. Connect Bose speaker amp. connector B137 and suspect front door speaker connector.
Bose speaker amp. connector B137 P

Terminal Terminal

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
4 5
Audio signal output

8 13
SKIB3609E

NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK FRONT DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY (AUDIO UNIT)
2. Disconnect Bose speaker amp. connector B138 and audio unit connector M83.
Bose speaker amp. Audio unit

Continuity
18 2
32 3
B138 M83 Yes
19 11
20 12
Bose speaker amp.

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
18
32
B138 — No
19
20
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK FRONT DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL (AUDIO UNIT)
1. Connect Bose speaker amp. connector B138 and audio unit connector M83.

Terminal Terminal
2 3
Audio signal output

11 12
SKIB3609E

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
NO >> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-144, "Removal and Installation". A
AV

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
• Damage
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK REAR DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY (BOSE SPEAKER AMP.)
1. Disconnect Bose speaker amp. connectors and suspect rear door speaker connector.
2. Check continuity between Bose speaker amp. connectors and suspect rear door speaker connector.
Bose speaker amp. Rear door speaker

Continuity
6 1
B137 D203 (LH)
7 2
Yes
37 1
B138 D303 (RH)
27 2
3. Check continuity between Bose speaker amp. connectors and ground.
Bose speaker amp.

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
6
B137
7
— No
37
B138
27
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK REAR DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL (BOSE SPEAKER AMP.)
1. Connect Bose speaker amp. connectors and suspect rear door speaker connector.
Bose speaker amp.

Connector
Terminal Terminal

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
B137 6 7
A
Audio signal output

B138 37 27 B
SKIB3609E
C
NO >> GO TO 4.
D
4.CHECK REAR DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY (AUDIO UNIT)
2. Disconnect Bose speaker amp. connector B138 and audio unit connector M83. E
Bose speaker amp. Audio unit F

Continuity
21 4
G
22 5
B138 M83 Yes
23 13
33 14 H
Bose speaker amp. I

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
21
J
22
B138 — No
23
33 K
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK REAR DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL (AUDIO UNIT)

1. Connect Bose speaker amp. connector B138 and audio unit connector M83. M
AV

Terminal Terminal
4 5
P
Audio signal output

13 14
SKIB3609E

REAR DOOR SPEAKER

SUBWOOFER
SUBWOOFER
A
B
C
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
Check the audio unit, BOSE speaker amp. and subwoofer connectors for the following:
• Damage
• Disconnected or looses terminals
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair the terminal and connector.
2.CHECK SUBWOOFER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY (BOSE SPEAKER AMP.) F
1. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector B137 and subwoofer connector.
2. Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. connector B137 and subwoofer connector.
G
BOSE speaker amp. Subwoofer
Continuity
H
1 2
10 1
B137 B116 Yes
2 4 I
3 3
3. Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. connector B137 and ground.
J
BOSE speaker amp.

Ground Continuity
1
10
B137 — No L
2
3
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK SUBWOOFER SIGNAL (BOSE SPEAKER AMP.) AV
1. Connect BOSE speaker amp. connector B137 and subwoofer connector.
4. Check the signal between the terminals of BOSE speaker amp. connector B137.
BOSE speaker amp. connector B137 P

Terminal Terminal

SUBWOOFER
1 10
Audio signal output

2 3
SKIB3609E

YES >> Replace subwoofer. Refer to AV-152, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK SUBWOOFER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY (AUDIO UNIT)
1. Disconnect audio unit connector M83 and BOSE speaker amp. connector B138.
2. Check continuity between audio unit connector M83 and BOSE speaker amp. connector B138.
Audio unit BOSE speaker amp.

Continuity
4 21
5 22
M83 B138 Yes
13 23
14 33
Audio unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
4
5
M83 — No
13
14
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK SUBWOOFER SIGNAL (AUDIO UNIT)
1. Connect audio unit connector M83 and BOSE speaker amp. connector B138.

Terminal Terminal
4 5
Audio signal output

13 14
SKIB3609E

YES >> Replace BOSE speaker amp. Refer to AV-147, "Removal and Installation".
SUBWOOFER
A
AV

AMP ON SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.CHECK CONTINUITY BETWEEN AUDIO UNIT AND BOSE SPEAKER AMP.

2. Disconnect audio unit connector M83 and Bose speaker amp. connector B138.
3. Check continuity between audio unit connector M83 and Bose speaker amp. connector B138
Audio unit Bose speaker amp.

Continuity
M83 1 B138 31 Yes
Audio unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
M83 1 — No
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK AUDIO UNIT VOLTAGE
1. Connect audio unit connector M83.
Audio unit Ground

Voltage
(+)
(–) (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M83 1 — Battery voltage

A
B
C
1.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN AUDIO UNIT AND MICROPHONE
2. Disconnect audio unit connector M87 and microphone connector R8. D
3. Check continuity between audio unit connector M87 and microphone connector R8.
Audio unit Microphone E

Continuity
31 3
45 1
F
M87 R8 Yes
46 4
47 2 G
Audio unit H
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
31
I
M87 45 — No
46
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connectors.
2.CHECK MICROPHONE POWER SUPPLY K
1. Connect audio unit connector M87 and microphone connector R8.

L
Microphone Ground
Voltage M
(+)
(-) (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
R8 4 — 5V AV
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-144, "Removal and Installation". O

Check signal between terminals of audio unit connector M87. P


Terminal Terminal
PKIB5037J


STEERING SWITCH
STEERING SWITCH
A
B

D
E
Condition
F
Depress BACK switch. 1
Depress switch. 52
134 G
Depress switch.
25
Depress OK switch. 264
Depress DISPLAY BACK switch. 654 H
Depress DISPLAY FWD switch. 2126
19 1
Depress switch.
I
Depress switch. 52
Depress switch. 134

18 J
Depress switch. 264
Depress SEEK DOWN switch. 654

K
Depress SEEK UP switch. 2126
YES >> GO TO 2. L
2.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN COMBINATION METER AND COMBINATION SWITCH
1. Disconnect combination meter connector M76 and combination switch connector M30. M
Combination meter Combination switch AV

Continuity
22 8
O
M76 23 M30 15 Yes
21 14
3. Check continuity between combination meter connector M76 and ground. P

STEERING SWITCH
Combination meter
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
22
M76 23 — No
21
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH
Combination switch
Continuity
25 8
M90 18 M30 15 Yes
19 14
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace spiral cable. Refer to SR-16, "Removal and Installation".
4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN COMBINATION METER AND AUDIO UNIT
1. Disconnect combination meter connector M77 and audio unit connector M87.
2. Check continuity between combination meter connector M77 and audio unit connector M87.
Combination meter Audio unit

Continuity
47 36
M77 M87 Yes
48 37
Combination meter
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
47
M77 — No
48

USB CONNECTOR
USB CONNECTOR
A
B
C
2. Disconnect audio unit connector M121 and USB interface connector M89. D
3. Check continuity between audio unit connector M121 and USB interface connector M89.
Audio unit USB interface E

Continuity
61 1
62 2
F
M121 63 M89 3 Yes

65 5 G
66 6
H
Audio unit
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
I
61
M121 Ground No
63
K
AV

1.CHECK AUX JACK HARNESS CONTINUITY

2. Disconnect audio control unit connector M88 and AUX in jack connector M104.
3. Check continuity between audio control unit connector M88 and AUX in jack connector M104.
Audio control unit AUX in jack

Continuity
21 1
M88 22 M104 2 Yes
23 3
4. Check continuity between audio control unit connector M88 and ground.
Audio control unit

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
21
M88 Ground No
22

AUDIO SYSTEM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [DISPLAY AUDIO WITH BOSE]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
AUDIO SYSTEM
B
RELATED TO AUDIO
C
The disk cannot be removed. Audio unit Refer to AV-83, "On Board Diagnosis Func-
D
tion".
AV

AUDIO SYSTEM
• Bose amp. ON signal circuit malfunction.
• Bose speaker amp. power supply and
ground circuits malfunction.
Refer to AV-114, "BOSE SPEAKER AMP
: Diagnosis Procedure".
audio unit and Bose speaker amp.
Refer to:
tweeter).
- AV-119, "Diagnosis Procedure" (center
speaker).
door speaker).
- AV-124, "Diagnosis Procedure" (rear
door speaker).
- AV-127, "Diagnosis Procedure" (sub-
woofer).
Bose speaker amp. and speaker.
Refer to:
No sound comes out or the level of the - AV-116, "Diagnosis Procedure" (front
sound is low. tweeter).
Only a certain speaker (front tweeter LH, speaker).
front tweeter RH, center speaker, front door - AV-121, "Diagnosis Procedure" (front
speaker LH, front door speaker RH, rear door speaker).
door speaker LH, rear door speaker RH, - AV-124, "Diagnosis Procedure" (rear
subwoofer) does not output sound. door speaker).
woofer).
• Malfunction in speaker.
Refer to:
tweeter).
- AV-150, "Removal and Installation" (cen-
ter speaker).
door speaker).
door speaker).
- AV-152, "Removal and Installation" (sub-
woofer).
Function".
• Malfunction in Bose speaker amp.
Replace Bose speaker amp. Refer to AV-
147, "Removal and Installation".

AUDIO SYSTEM
A
Function".
Noise comes out from all speakers.
• Malfunction in Bose speaker amp. B
C
audio unit and Bose speaker amp.
Refer to:
- AV-116, "Diagnosis Procedure" (front D
tweeter).
speaker).
- AV-121, "Diagnosis Procedure" (front E
door speaker).
door speaker).
- AV-127, "Diagnosis Procedure" (sub- F
woofer).
Refer to: G
tweeter).
H
Noise is mixed with audio. er (front tweeter LH, front tweeter RH, cen- - AV-121, "Diagnosis Procedure" (front
ter speaker, front door speaker LH, front door speaker).
door speaker RH, rear door speaker LH, - AV-124, "Diagnosis Procedure" (rear I
rear door speaker RH, subwoofer). door speaker).
woofer).
• Malfunction in speaker. J
Refer to:
tweeter).
- AV-150, "Removal and Installation" (cen- K
ter speaker).
door speaker).
- AV-151, "Removal and Installation" (rear L
door speaker).
woofer).
M
Function".
• Malfunction in Bose speaker amp. AV
antenna feeder.
O
roads)
Feeder".
• Antenna amp. ON signal circuit malfunc- P
tion.
antenna feeder.
Feeder".

AUDIO SYSTEM
• Poor connector connection of antenna or
No satellite radio reception. Satellite radio antenna malfunction. antenna feeder.
Feeder".
Buzz/rattle sound from speaker BLE DIAGNOSIS" in the appropriate interi-
or trim section.

the vehicle.
Check Compatibility
NOTE:
3. Write down the customer’s phone brand, model and service provider.
NOTE:
one provider, but may not be on the approved list with other providers.
b. If the customer’s phone is NOT on the approved list:
any further action.
c. If the feature related to the customer’s concern shows as “N” (not compatible):
d. If the feature related to the customer’s concern shows as “Y” (compatible):
Perform diagnosis as per the following table.

play at the guide).
established. Malfunction in audio unit.
Hands-free phone cannot be established. • Hands-free phone operation can be per- Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-144, "Re-
formed, however, voice between each moval and Installation".
sation.

AUDIO SYSTEM
A
Steering switch malfunction.
work, but does not work. B
The system cannot be operated.
and do not work.
C
Steering switch ground circuit malfunction.
AV

RELATED TO NOISE
etc.).
external noise from trains and other sources. It is not a malfunction.
NOTE:

A cracking or snapping sound occurs with the op-
Noise only occurs when various • Relay malfunction, audio unit malfunction
eration of various switches.
ing. • Motor

lowing conditions:
NOTE:

A
call.
C
AV

AUDIO UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [DISPLAY AUDIO WITH BOSE]

AUDIO UNIT
AWNIA3340ZZ
REMOVAL
6. Disconnect the harness connectors from the audio unit and remove.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
When replacing audio unit, the audio unit must be registered. Refer to AV-112, "REGISTRATION
(AUDIO UNIT) : Description".

STEERING SWITCHES
STEERING SWITCHES
A
I
ALOIA0584ZZ
K
REMOVAL
NOTE:
L
M
: Pawl
AV
ALOIA0575ZZ

STEERING SWITCHES
: Pawl
ALOIA0576ZZ
INSTALLATION

BOSE SPEAKER AMP
BOSE SPEAKER AMP
A
REMOVAL B
1. Slide the passenger seat to the full forward position.
2. Release the clips using a suitable tool and remove Bose
speaker amp cover (1). C
: Metal clip
: Clip
D
ALNIA1577ZZ
F
3. Remove Bose speaker amp bolts (A).
4. Disconnect the harness connectors (B) from the Bose speaker
amp (1). G
I
ALNIA1578ZZ
5. Remove the Bose speaker amp and bracket as an assembly. J

6. Remove the bolts and the Bose speaker amp from the Bose speaker amp bracket (if necessary).
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. K
AV

FRONT TWEETER
FRONT TWEETER
REMOVAL
ment panel assembly (2).
: Pawl
: Front
3. Disconnect the harness connector from the front tweeter and
remove.
ALNIA1663ZZ
INSTALLATION

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
A
ALNIA1580ZZ
I
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000014844338 J
REMOVAL
1. Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-15, "Removal and Installation". K
L
INSTALLATION
M
AV

CENTER SPEAKER
CENTER SPEAKER
REMOVAL
1. Release the metal clips (A) using a suitable tool and remove
center speaker grille (1).
2. Remove the center speaker bolts (B).
3. Pull out the center speaker (2).
ALNIA1579ZZ
4. Disconnect the harness connector from the center speaker and remove.
INSTALLATION

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
A
I
ALNIA1581ZZ
K
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
AV

SUBWOOFER
SUBWOOFER
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear luggage floor finisher. Refer to INT-32, "Exploded View".
2. Remove the spare tire clamp (1) by rotating counterclockwise.
3. Disconnect the harness connector (A) from the subwoofer (2)
and remove.
: Front
ALNIA2059ZZ
INSTALLATION

A
REMOVAL B
jack (2), then remove from the front of cluster lid C (1). C
ALNIA1582ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
G
AV

MICROPHONE
MICROPHONE
REMOVAL
from the pawl (B).
ALNIA1583ZZ
INSTALLATION

ANTENNA BASE
ANTENNA BASE
A
AWNIA4563ZZ
G

H
REMOVAL
I
J
INSTALLATION K
CAUTION:
If the antenna base nut is not properly tightened, lower sensitivity of the antenna may be experienced. L
M
DISASSEMBLY
from antenna base (2). AV
AWNIA4564ZZ
ASSEMBLY

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [NAVIGATION WITHOUT BOSE]
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
WARNING:
nance and repair be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
see the SR section.
ness connectors.
WARNING:
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
Cautions in Removing Battery Terminal and AV Control Unit (Models with AV Control
Unit) INFOID:0000000014844349
CAUTION:
Remove battery terminal and AV control unit 30 seconds or more after turning the ignition switch OFF.
NOTE:
After the ignition switch is turned OFF, the AV control unit continues operating for approximately 30 seconds.
Therefore, data corruption may occur if battery voltage is cut off within 30 seconds.
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis INFOID:0000000014844350
• Do not apply voltage of 7.0 V or higher to the measurement terminals.
• Use the tester with its open terminal voltage being 7.0 V or less.
• Be sure to turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal before
checking the circuit.

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [NAVIGATION WITHOUT BOSE]
must be within 110 mm (4.33 in).] A
PKIA0306E
D
twisted line will be lost.) E
G
PKIA0307E

H
• When removing (disengaging) components with a screwdriver or similar tool, be sure to wrap the component I
• Replace a deformed or damaged clip. J
• Follow the steps below to clean components: K
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth. L
- Oily dirt:
area.
• Then dip a cloth into fresh water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the detergent off. M
- For genuine leather seats, use a genuine leather seat cleaner. AV

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [NAVIGATION WITHOUT BOSE]
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
(TechMate No.)
Tool name
(J-46534)
Trim Tool Set
AWJIA0483ZZ

PIIB1407E

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [NAVIGATION WITHOUT BOSE]
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A
COMPONENT PARTS
B
L
ALNIA2037ZZ
No. Component Function M

AM/FM antennas)
2. Microphone Refer to AV-161, "Microphone". AV
3. Rear door speaker RH Refer to AV-160, "Speakers".
4. AV control unit Refer to AV-160, "AV Control Unit".
O
5. Front tweeter RH
7. USB interface and AUX in jack Refer to AV-161, "USB Interface and AUX In Jack". P
8. Front tweeter LH Refer to AV-160, "Speakers".

COMPONENT PARTS
AV Control Unit INFOID:0000000015258423
• A 7-inch WVGA display, an AM/FM electronic tuner radio, CD

drive, audio amplifier, camera controller and navigation unit are
integrated into the AV control unit.
• The 7-inch display is a high resolution monitor that includes touch
panel functions.
separate USB interface.
*
: iPod® is a registered trademark of Apple, Inc. All rights reserved.
ALNIA1590ZZ
FRONT TWEETER
instrument panel.
• Sound signals are input from the AV control unit to output high
range sounds.
ALNIA1593ZZ
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER

doors.
• Sound signals are input from the AV control unit to output low
range sounds.
JPNIA1454ZZ
REAR DOOR SPEAKER

• 16.5 cm (6.5 in) speakers are installed in the bottom of the rear
doors.
• Sound signals are input from the AV control unit to output high, mid
and low range sounds.
JPNIA1454ZZ

COMPONENT PARTS
USB Interface and AUX In Jack INFOID:0000000015258425
A
• iPod® and USB memory can be connected to the AV control unit
through the USB interface. B
• An external audio device can be connected to the AV control unit
C
D
ALNIA1841ZZ

E
• Switches are connected to the combination meter. F
• Combination meter is connected to the AV control unit via AV com-
munication.
G
H
ALNIA2039ZZ
I
• The power is supplied from the AV control unit.
J
ALNIA2040ZZ
Combination Meter INFOID:0000000015258428 M

• Combination meter sends the steering switch signals to the audio AV
ALNIA2041ZZ
GPS ANTENNA

COMPONENT PARTS
• GPS antenna is installed in the instrument panel.
• Power is supplied from the AV control unit.
• This antenna amplifies radio waves received from the GPS satel-
lite and transmits the GPS signal to the AV control unit.
NOTE:
An object on the instrument panel may cause the reception sensitiv-
ity to be decreased.
JSNIA5132ZZ
ROOF ANTENNA
of the roof.
• It receives radio waves and outputs them to AV control unit.
• It receives satellite radio waves and outputs them to AV control
unit.
ALNIA2043ZZ
AWNIA4565GB

COMPONENT PARTS
ALNIA2044ZZ
K
1. M503 2. M502 3. M130, M501

4. M129, M500 5. M142 6. M139 L
7. M141
SD Card INFOID:0000000015258430
M
• Map data is memorized in the SD card.
• Map data is sent to the AV control unit from the SD slot.
AV

SYSTEM
SYSTEM
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
AWNIA4583GB
AUDIO SYSTEM
The audio system consists of the following component:
• AV control unit
• Front tweeters
• USB interface
• AUX in jack
• Steering switches
amp. and sent to the AV control unit. The AV control unit then sends audio signals to the front tweeters, front
door speakers and rear door speakers.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Description
• The navigation system can be operated by control panel of the AV control unit and display (touch panel) of
the AV control unit.
• Guide sound during the operation of the navigation system is output from AV control unit to front tweeters.
• AV control unit calculates the vehicle location based on the signals from GYRO (angle speed sensor), vehi-
cle sensor, and GPS satellite, as well as the map data from map SD-card. The vehicle location is displayed
on the AV control unit.
POSITION DETECTION PRINCIPLE
The navigation system periodically calculates the vehicle's current position according to the following three
signals:
• Travel distance of the vehicle as determined by the vehicle speed sensor
• Turning angle of the vehicle as determined by the gyroscope (angular velocity sensor)
• Direction of vehicle travel as determined by the GPS antenna (GPS information)
The current position of the vehicle is then identified by comparing the calculated vehicle position with map data
read from the map SD-card (map-matching), and indicated on the screen as a vehicle mark. More accurate
data is judged and used by comparing vehicle position detection results found by the GPS with the result by
map-matching.

SYSTEM
The current vehicle position will be calculated by detecting the dis-
tance the vehicle moved from the previous calculation point and its A
direction.
• Travel distance
Travel distance calculations are based on the vehicle speed sen-
B
sor input signal. Therefore, the calculation may become incorrect
as the tires wear down. To prevent this, an automatic distance cor-
rection function has been adopted.
• Travel direction C
Change in the travel direction of the vehicle is calculated by a gyro-
scope (angular velocity sensor) and a GPS antenna (GPS informa-
SEL684V
tion). They have both advantages and disadvantages. D
Type Advantage Disadvantage

Gyroscope Can detect the vehicle's turning angle quite Direction errors may accumulate when vehicle is E
(angular velocity sensor) accurately. driven for long distances without stopping.
GPS antenna Can detect the vehicle's travel direction Correct direction cannot be detected when vehicle
(GPS information) (North/South/East/West). speed is low.
F
More accurate traveling direction is detected because priorities are set for the signals from these two
devices according to the situation.
MAP-MATCHING G
Map-matching compares a current location detected by the method
in the “Location Detection Principle” with a road map data from map
SD-card. H
NOTE:
The road map data is based on data stored in the map SD-card.
I
J
SEL685V
The vehicle position may not be corrected under the following circumstances and after driving for a certain K
time when GPS information is difficult to receive. In this case, the vehicle mark on the display must be cor-
rected manually:
• In map-matching, alternative routes to reach the destination will be L
shown and prioritized, after the road on which the vehicle is cur-
rently driven has been judged and the vehicle mark has been repo-
sitioned.
Alternative routes will be shown in different order of priority, and M
the incorrect road can be avoided if there is an error in distance
and/or direction.
Routes are of the same priority if two roads are running in parallel. AV
Therefore, the vehicle mark may appear on either of them alter-
nately, depending on maneuvering of the steering wheel and con-
figuration of the road.
SEL686V O

SYSTEM
• Map-matching does not function correctly when a road on which
the vehicle is driving is new and not recorded in the map SD-card,
or when road pattern stored in the map data and the actual road
pattern are different due to repair.
The map-matching function may find another road and position the
vehicle mark on it when driving on a road not present in the map.
Then, the vehicle mark may change to it when the correct road is
detected.
• Effective range for comparing the vehicle position and travel direc-
tion calculated by the distance and direction with the road data
read from the map SD-card is limited. Therefore, correction by
SKIA0613E
map-matching is not possible when there is an excessive gap
between current vehicle position and the position on the map.
GPS (Global Positioning System)
GPS (Global Positioning System) is developed for and is controlled
by the US Department of Defense. The system utilizes GPS satel-
lites (NAVSTAR), transmitting out radio waves while flying on an orbit
around the earth at an altitude of approximately 21,000 km (13,049
mile).
The receiver calculates the travel position in three dimensions (lati-
tude/longitude/altitude) according to the time lag of the radio waves
that four or more GPS satellites transmit (three-dimensional position-
ing). The GPS receiver calculates the travel position in two dimen-
sions (latitude/longitude) with the previous altitude data if the GPS
receiver receives only three radio waves (two-dimensional position-
SEL526V
ing). GPS position correction is not performed while stopping the
vehicle.
Accuracy of the GPS will deteriorate under the following conditions:

• In two-dimensional positioning, GPS accuracy will deteriorate when altitude of the vehicle position changes.
• The position of GPS satellite affects GPS detection precision. The position detection may not be precisely
performed.
• The position detection is not performed if GPS receiver does not receive radio waves from GPS satellites.
(Inside a tunnel, parking in a building, under an elevated highway etc.) GPS receiver may not receive radio
waves from GPS satellites if any object is placed on the GPS antenna.
NOTE:
• The detection result has an error of approximately 10 m (32.81 ft) even with a high-precision three dimen-
sional positioning.
• There may be cases when the accuracy is lowered and radio waves are stopped intentionally because the
GPS satellite signal is controlled by the US trace control center.
USB INTERFACE
• iPod® or music files in USB memory can be played.
• Sound signals are transmitted from USB interface to the AV control unit and output to each speaker.
• iPod® is recharged when connected to USB interface.
AUX IN JACK
• Sound can be output from an external device by connecting a device to the AUX in jack.
• AUX sound signals are transmitted to each speaker via AV control unit.
• Volume level of this system goes up and down automatically in proportion to the vehicle speed.
• The control level can be selected by the customer.
• Bluetooth® control is built into AV control unit.
• The connection between cellular phone and AV control unit is performed with Bluetooth® communication.
• The voice guidance signal is input from the AV control unit and output to the front speakers when operating
the cellular phone.

SYSTEM
• Spoken voice sound output from the microphone (microphone signal) is input to AV control unit.
• AV control unit outputs to cellular phone with Bluetooth® communication as a TEL voice signal. A
• Voice sound is input to own cellular phone from the other party. B
• TEL voice signal is input to AV control unit by establishing Bluetooth® communication from cellular phone,
and the signal is output to front speakers.
C
AV

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
The AV control unit on board diagnosis performs the functions listed in the table below:
Mode Item Content

Version data of the AV control unit is dis-
Version —
played.
Allows correction of the position detec-
User Configuration Touch Display Calibration —
tion accuracy of the touch panel.
FM monitor — Monitors the dynamic values of the cur-
Radio
AM monitor — rent tuner
SXM monitor — Version data is displayed.

• SD card slot Access
• Power Supply
• Speed Signal
• Direction Signal
• Illumination Signal
• GPS Antenna
• GPS Tracking
• Satellites Visible
Running System Status • Satellites Tracked The current system status is displayed.
• Microphone Current
• Steering wheel key
• Radio Antenna
• SXM Antenna
• USB Device
System State • iPod® firmware version
• BT Status
Speaker Test 4kHz This activates a sequence of test tone
— outputs to the audio circuits one after the
Speaker Test 100Hz other for 1 second.
This provides a test sequence where
test displays (plain colored display: e.g.
white, black, red, blue, green) are shown
one after the other.
The respective color is shown for an in-
Display-Test —
dicated period of time (parameter). After
the display test, the design of the display
previously available is stored. While the
screen shows a plain colored display, a
pixel malfunction may be detected.
• SD Card Access
• BT Module Access
A system self test is executed and the
Self Test • Radio Antenna
results are stored into the error memory.
• GPS Antenna
• SXM Antenna
Perform CONSULT diagnosis if the AV control unit on board diagnosis does not start or the screen does not
display anything.
METHOD OF STARTING

2. While pressing the APPS button, turn the TUNE-SCROLL dial
counterclockwise 3 or more clicks, then clockwise 3 or more A
clicks, then counterclockwise 3 or more clicks. Shifting from cur-
rent screen to previous screen is performed by pressing BACK
button.
B
ALNIA1591ZZ
D
3. The trouble diagnosis initial screen is displayed, and Version,
User Config, Radio, System State or Self Test can be selected.
E
G
ALNIA1378ZZ
CONSULT Function INFOID:0000000015258434

H
CONSULT FUNCTIONS
CONSULT performs the following functions via communication with the AV control unit: I
Direct Diagnostic Mode Description
Ecu Identification The AV control unit part number is displayed. J
Self Diagnostic Result The AV control unit self diagnostic results are displayed.
Data Monitor The AV control unit input/output data is displayed in real time.
• The vehicle specification can be read and saved. K
Configuration
• The vehicle specification can be written when replacing AV control unit.
• The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of AV communication is displayed.
CAN Diag Support Mntr
• The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication is displayed. L
ECU IDENTIFICATION
The part number of AV control unit is displayed.
M
SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
Refer to AV-173, "DTC Index".
DATA MONITOR AV
Monitor Item [Unit] Description

Indicates vehicle speed signal received from combination meter on CAN communication O
VHCL SPD SIG [On/Off]
line.
ILLUM SIG [On/Off] Indicates condition of illumination signal for the AV control unit.
IGN SIG [On/Off] Indicates condition of ignition signal. P
REV SIG [On/Off] Indicates condition of reverse signal received from BCM.
CONFIGURATION
Refer to AV-190, "CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Description".
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
Refer to LAN-23, "CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor".

AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [NAVIGATION WITHOUT BOSE]

AV CONTROL UNIT
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL
Monitor Item Condition Value/Status

Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH). Off
VHCL SPD SIG
Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH). On
Illumination signal is not received. Off
ILLUM SIG
Illumination signal is received. On
Ignition switch OFF. Off
IGN SIG
Ignition switch ON. On
Selector lever in any position other than R. Off
REV SIG
Selector lever in R position. On
TERMINAL LAYOUT
AWNIA4163ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal
Output switch
2 3 Sound signal front speaker

(W) (P) and tweeter LH
SKIB3609E
4 5 Sound signal rear speaker

(GR) (BR) LH
SKIB3609E
7
(W)
8 Input/
— CAN high — — —
(L) Output

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Output switch
9 B
Ground Illumination control signal Input ON Headlamps ON Battery voltage
(V)
11 12 Sound signal front speaker

(G) (V) and tweeter RH
D
SKIB3609E
13 14 Sound signal rear speaker F

(LG) (Y) RH
SKIB3609E
G
17 Input/
— CAN low — — —
(R) Output
H
18 When vehicle speed is ap- I

J
JSNIA0012GB
19
(L)
K
20
(B)

(G) (AUX input) M
SKIB3609E
AV
22
(Y)

(L) (AUX input) P
SKIB3609E
24
— HE/VR mode change — — — —
(R)

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Output switch
Battery voltage
25 verse)
0V
30
— MR output Output — — —
(BG)
31 Input/
(SB) Output
32 Input/
(LG) Output

(W) (Shield) phone.
SKIB3609E
35
(B)
37
(Shield)
38 Input/
(SB) Output
39 Input/
(LG) Output
40
(LG)
41 When camera image is dis-

Ground Camera image signal Input ON
(G) played
SKIB2251J
42 Camera image signal

— — — — —
(Shield) shield
45
(R)
46
(W)
47
— USB + signal — — — —
(G)
49
(B)
50
(Shield)
51 AV control unit ON, FM-AM
(B) selected.

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Output switch
52 AV control unit ON, FM-AM B
Ground AM-FM main antenna Input ON 5.0 V
(B) selected.
53
— Antenna amp. Shield — — — —
(Shield) C
56 AV control unit ON, SXM
(B) selected.
57 D
(Shield)
58 AV control unit ON, NAV se-
Ground GPS antenna signal Input ON 5.0 V
(B) lected. E
59
— GPS antenna shield — — — —
(Shield)
DTC Index INFOID:0000000015258436

F
CONSULT Display Reference Page G

U1000: CAN COMM CIRCUIT AV-193, "DTC Description"
U1010: CONTROL UNIT (CAN) AV-194, "DTC Description"
H
U1217: BLUETOOTH MODULE AV-195, "DTC Description"
U1229: iPod CERTIFICATION AV-196, "DTC Description"
U122F: Digital broadcasting connection error AV-197, "DTC Description" I
U1244: GPS ANTENNA CONN AV-198, "DTC Description"
U1258: SXM ANTENNA CONN AV-199, "DTC Description"
J
U1263: USB OVERCURRENT AV-201, "DTC Description"
U12AA: Configuration Error AV-202, "DTC Description"
U12AB: FM Antenna error AV-203, "DTC Description" K
U12AC: Display Temperature too High AV-204, "DTC Description"
U12AD: ECU Temperature too High AV-205, "DTC Description"
U12AE: Internal Amplifier temperature Warning AV-206, "DTC Description" L
U12AF: CD Mechanism Temperature Warning AV-207, "DTC Description"
U12B0: Supply Voltage Goes below 9V > 20s AV-208, "DTC Description"
M
U12B1: Supply Voltage Goes High > 16V for 20s AV-209, "DTC Description"
U1300: AV COMM CIRCUIT AV-210, "DTC Description"
U1310: CONTROL UNIT(AV) AV-212, "DTC Description" AV

NAVIGATION WITHOUT BOSE
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [NAVIGATION WITHOUT BOSE]
WIRING DIAGRAM
AANWA1820GB

AV
AANWA1821GB

AANWA1822GB

AV
AANIA5771GB

AANIA5772GB

AV
AANIA5773GB

AANIA5774GB

AV
AANIA5775GB

AANIA5776GB

AV
AANIA5777GB

AANIA5778GB

AV
AANIA5779GB

AANIA5780GB

< BASIC INSPECTION > [NAVIGATION WITHOUT BOSE]
BASIC INSPECTION A
B
OVERALL SEQUENCE
C
AWNIA2982GB M
DETAILED FLOW
1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM AV
O
>> GO TO 2.
2.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM P
when the symptom is detected.
>> GO TO 3.
3.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait for 2 seconds or more.

2. Perform Self Diagnostic Result for MULTI AV.
Are any DTCs displayed?
YES >> Refer to AV-173, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.PERFORM SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
Refer to AV-226, "Symptom Table".
>> GO TO 5.
5.FINAL CHECK
Refer to symptom described by the customer in step 1.
Is the symptom still present?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Inspection End.

A
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AV CONTROL UNIT
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AV CONTROL UNIT : Description
INFOID:0000000015258664 B
BEFORE REPLACEMENT
When replacing AV control unit, save or print current vehicle specification with CONSULT configuration before C
replacement.
NOTE:
If “Before Replace ECU” cannot be used, use the “After Replace ECU” or “Manual Configuration” after replac- D
ing AV control unit.
AFTER REPLACEMENT
CAUTION: E
When replacing AV control unit, you must perform “After Replace ECU” with CONSULT.
• Complete the procedure of “After Replace ECU” in order.
• If you set incorrect “After Replace ECU”, incidents might occur.
• Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model. F
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AV CONTROL UNIT : Work Procedure

INFOID:0000000015258665
G
1.SAVING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION
-CONSULT H
Enter “Re/Programming, Configuration” and perform “Before Replace ECU” to save or print current vehicle
specification.
NOTE:
I
If “Before Replace ECU” cannot be used, use the “After Replace ECU” or “Manual Configuration” after replac-
J
>> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE AV CONTROL UNIT
Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-239, "Removal and Installation". K
>> GO TO 3.
L
3.WRITING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION
CONSULT
1. Enter "Re/Programming, Configuration". M
2. If “Before Replace ECU” operation was performed, automatically an "Operation Log Selection" screen will
be displayed. Select the applicable file from the "Saved Data List" and press “Confirm” to write vehicle
specification. Refer to AV-190, "CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Work Procedure".
3. If “Before Replace ECU” operation was not performed, select "After Replace ECU" or "Manual Configura- AV
tion" to write vehicle specification. Refer to AV-190, "CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Work Pro-
cedure".
O
>> GO TO 4.
4.REGISTER AV CONTROL UNIT P
Perform AV control unit registration. Refer to AV-191, "REGISTRATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Work Proce-
dure".
>> GO TO 5.
5.OPERATION CHECK
Check that the operation of the AV control unit and camera images (fixed guide lines) are normal.

>> Work End.

CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT)
CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Description INFOID:0000000015258666
Vehicle specification needs to be written with CONSULT because it is not written after replacing AV control
unit.
Configuration has three functions as follows:
Function Description
• Reads the vehicle configuration of current AV control unit.
"Before Replace ECU"
• Saves the read vehicle configuration.
"After Replace ECU" Writes the vehicle configuration with manual selection.
"Select Saved Data List" Writes the vehicle configuration with saved data.
CAUTION:
• When replacing AV control unit, you must perform “Select Saved Data List” or "After Replace ECU"
with CONSULT.
• Complete the procedure of “Select Saved Data List” or "After Replace ECU" in order.
• If you set incorrect “Select Saved Data List” or "After Replace ECU", incidents might occur.
• Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model.
• Never perform “Select Saved Data List” or "After Replace ECU" except for new AV control unit.
CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Work Procedure INFOID:0000000015258667
1.WRITING MODE SELECTION

CONSULT
Select “Reprogramming, Configuration” of AV control unit.
When writing saved data>>GO TO 2.

When writing manually>>GO TO 3.
2.PERFORM “SAVED DATA LIST”
CONSULT
Automatically “Operation Log Selection” window will display if “Before Replace ECU” was performed. Select
applicable file from the “Save Data List” and press “Confirm”.
>> Work End.

3.PERFORM “AFTER REPLACE ECU” OR “MANUAL CONFIGURATION”
CONSULT
1. Select “After Replace ECU” or “Manual Configuration”.
2. Identify the correct model and configuration list. Refer to AV-191, "CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL
UNIT) : Configuration List".
3. Confirm and/or change setting value for each item.
CAUTION:
Thoroughly read and understand the vehicle specification. ECU control may not operate normally
if the setting is not correct.
4. Select “Next”.
CAUTION:
Make sure to select “Next”, confirm each setting value and press “OK” even if the indicated con-
figuration of brand new AV control unit is same as the desirable configuration. If not, configuration
which is set automatically by selecting vehicle model can not be memorized.
5. When "Completed", select "End".
>> GO TO 4.

4.OPERATION CHECK A
Confirm that each function controlled by AV control unit operates normally.
>> Work End. B

CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Configuration List INFOID:0000000015258668
CAUTION: C
Thoroughly read and understand the vehicle specification. Incorrect settings may result in abnormal
control of ECU.
D
MANUAL SETTING ITEM
Items Setting value
SOUND SYSTEM BASE ⇔ BOSE E
CAMERA SYSTEM NONE/AVM ⇔ REAR CAMERA
⇔: Items which confirm vehicle specifications
F
REGISTRATION (AV CONTROL UNIT)
REGISTRATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Description INFOID:0000000015258669
G
AFTER REPLACEMENT
If the AV control unit is replaced with a new AV control unit, the new AV control unit must be registered using
the registration code. H
CAUTION:
If the new AV control unit registration code is not registered, the “APPS” mode will not function.
REGISTRATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Work Procedure INFOID:0000000015258670
I
1.RECORD REGISTRATION CODE FOR REPLACEMENT AV CONTROL UNIT

J
1. Refer to the replacement AV control unit’s label located on the top of the AV control unit.
AV
ALNIA1654ZZ
P
2. Create a registration code to supply to NISSAN Owner Services by combining the last 9 digits of the NIS-
SAN PART NO. (1) and the first 7 digits of the bar code number (2).

AWNIA3614ZZ
3. Record the registration code.
>> GO TO 2.
2.REGISTER REPLACEMENT AV CONTROL UNIT
Register the replacement AV control unit by contacting NISSAN Owner Services. Refer to TSB.
>> GO TO 3.
3.OPERATION CHECK
Verify that the AV control unit “APPS” function operates normally.
>> Work End.

U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [NAVIGATION WITHOUT BOSE]
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000015258681
B
DESCRIPTION
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real-time application. It is an on-vehicle mul- C
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec-
tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independently). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN-H, CAN-L) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each D
control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
CAN Communication Signal Chart. Refer to LAN-44, "CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : CAN Communica-
tion Signal Chart". E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
CONSULT screen terms F

DTC No. DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.
Signal (terminal) — G
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
U1000
(CAN COMM CIRCUIT) Threshold —
Diagnosis delay time —
H
POSSIBLE CAUSE
CAN communication system
I
FAIL-SAFE
—
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE J
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CONSULT K
2. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “MULTI AV”.
3. Check DTC.
L
Is DTC U1000 detected?
YES >> Proceed to AV-193, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-54, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: Inspection End. M
AV

O
CONSULT
2. Erase DTC.
3. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “MULTI AV”. P
4. Check DTC.
YES >> Refer to LAN-26, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
NO >> Refer to GI-54, "Intermittent Incident".

U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
DESCRIPTION
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real-time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
communication lines (CAN-H, CAN-L) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each
tion Signal Chart".
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
CONSULT screen terms

CONTROL UNIT(CAN) Signal (terminal) —

U1010
[Control unit(CAN)] Threshold —
POSSIBLE CAUSE
FAIL-SAFE
—
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CONSULT
3. Check DTC.
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: Inspection End.

CONSULT
2. Erase DTC.
4. Check DTC.
YES >> Replace the AV control unit. Refer to AV-239, "Removal and Installation".

U1217 AV CONTROL UNIT
A
DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

(Trouble diagnosis content) C
Signal (terminal) —
BLUETOOTH MODULE
U1217 Communication error to Bluetooth sub mod- D
(Bluetooth module) Threshold
ule
E
POSSIBLE CAUSE
AV control unit
FAIL-SAFE F
—
G
CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON. H
3. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1217 detected? I
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: Inspection End. J

CONSULT L
2. Erase DTC.
3. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “MULTI AV”. M
4. Check DTC.
YES >> Replace the AV control unit. Refer to AV-239, "Removal and Installation". AV

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

iPod CERTIFICATION
U1229 Communication error to iPod authentication
(iPod certification) Threshold
chip
POSSIBLE CAUSE
AV control unit
FAIL-SAFE
—
CONSULT
3. Check DTC.

CONSULT
2. Erase DTC.
4. Check DTC.

U122F AV CONTROL UNIT
A

Digital broadcasting connection er-
ror Signal (terminal) —
U122F
(Digital broadcasting connection Threshold — D
error)
POSSIBLE CAUSE E
AV control unit
FAIL-SAFE
— F

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE G
CONSULT
2. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “MULTI AV”. H
3. Check DTC.
Is DTC U122F detected?
YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-352, "Removal and Installation". I
J
AV

U1244 GPS ANTENNA
U1244 GPS ANTENNA
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

GPS ANTENNA CONN Signal (terminal) —

U1244
(GPS antenna conn) Threshold GPS antenna disconnected or short circuit
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• GPS antenna disconnected
• GPS antenna signal circuit open or short to ground
• GPS antenna
• AV control unit
FAIL-SAFE
—
CONSULT
3. Check DTC.
1.GPS ANTENNA INSPECTION

Visually inspect the GPS antenna and antenna feeder. Refer to AV-248, "Removal and Installation".
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning components.
2.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE
2. Check voltage between AV control unit connector M141 terminal 58 and ground.
AV control unit Voltage

Ground
M141 58 — 5.0 V
YES >> Replace GPS antenna. Refer to AV-248, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-239, "Removal and Installation".

U1258 SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA
A

XM ANTENNA CONN
U1258 Satellite antenna disconnected or short cir- D
(XM antenna conn) Threshold
cuit
E
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Satellite antenna disconnected
• Satellite antenna signal circuit open or short to ground F
• Satellite antenna
• AV control unit
FAIL-SAFE G
—
H
CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON. I
3. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1258 detected? J
K
L
M
1.SATELLITE ANTENNA INSPECTION
Visually inspect the satellite antenna and antenna feeder. Refer to AV-161, "Antenna and Antenna Feeder".
Is inspection result normal? AV
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SATELLITE ANTENNA FEEDER CONTINUITY O

2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M142 and satellite radio antenna connector M503.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M142 and satellite radio antenna connector M503. P
AV control unit Satellite radio antenna

Continuity
M142 56 M503 4 Yes
4. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M142 and ground.

AV control unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
M142 56 — No
YES >> GO TO 3.
1. Connect AV control unit connector M142 and satellite radio antenna connector M503.

Ground
M142 56 — 5.0 V
YES >> Replace satellite radio antenna AV-249, "Removal and Installation".

U1263 USB
U1263 USB
A

USB OVERCURRENT
U1263 USB power supply excess maximum cur- D
(USB overcurrent) Threshold
rent
E
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Device connected to USB interface
• USB interface harness F
• AV control unit
FAIL-SAFE
— G
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE H
CONSULT
1. If there is a device connected to the USB interface, disconnect it.
4. Check DTC.
K
1.CHECK USB INTERFACE HARNESS L

Visually inspect USB interface harness. Refer to AV-246, "Removal and Installation".
YES >> GO TO 2. M
NO >> Replace USB interface harness. Refer to AV-246, "Removal and Installation".
2.CHECK USB INTERFACE HARNESS AV
Check USB interface harness circuits. Refer to AV-224, "Diagnosis Procedure".
YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-239, "Removal and Installation". O

U12AA CONFIGURATION ERROR
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Configuration Error Signal (terminal) —

U12AA
(Configuration Error) Threshold Incomplete Configuration
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• AV control unit configuration
• AV control unit
FAIL-SAFE
—
CONSULT
3. Check DTC.
Is DTC U12AA detected?
1.PERFORM CONFIGURATION
CONSULT
1. Perform configuration procedure. Refer to AV-190, "CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Work Pro-
cedure".
4. Check DTC.

U12AB ANTENNA
U12AB ANTENNA
A

FM Antenna error Signal (terminal) —

U12AB
(FM Antenna error) Threshold Rod antenna disconnected or short circuit D
POSSIBLE CAUSE E
• Rod antenna disconnected
• AM/FM antenna signal open or short to ground
• Rod antenna F
• AV control unit
FAIL-SAFE
— G
CONSULT
2. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “MULTI AV”. I
3. Check DTC.
Is DTC U12AB detected?
YES >> Proceed to AV-203, "Diagnosis Procedure". J
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000015258698 K
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-174, "Wiring Diagram". L
1.ANTENNA INSPECTION M
Visually inspect the antenna and antenna feeder. Refer to AV-161, "Antenna and Antenna Feeder".
AV
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE O
P
Ground
M139 52 — 5.0 V
YES >> Replace antenna base. Refer to AV-249, "Removal and Installation".

U12AC AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Display Temperature too High
U12AC Upper operation temperature of display ex-
(Display Temperature too High) Threshold
ceeded
POSSIBLE CAUSE
AV control unit
FAIL-SAFE
—
CONSULT
3. Check DTC.
Is DTC U12AC detected?

CONSULT
2. Erase DTC.
4. Check DTC.

U12AD AV CONTROL UNIT
A

ECU Temperature too High
U12AD Upper operation temperature of AV control D
(ECU Temperature too High) Threshold
unit exceeded
E
POSSIBLE CAUSE
AV control unit
FAIL-SAFE F
—
G
CONSULT
3. Check DTC.
Is DTC U12AD detected? I

CONSULT L
2. Erase DTC.
4. Check DTC.
Is DTC U12AD detected?

U12AE AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Internal Amplifier temperature
Warning Signal (terminal) —
U12AE
(Internal Amplifier temperature Threshold Amplifier temperature threshold exceeded
Warning)
POSSIBLE CAUSE
AV control unit
FAIL-SAFE
—
CONSULT
3. Check DTC.
Is DTC U12AE detected?

CONSULT
2. Erase DTC.
4. Check DTC.

U12AF AV CONTROL UNIT
A

CD Mechanism Temperature Signal (terminal) —
Warning
U12AF Upper operation temperature of CD drive D
(CD Mechanism Temperature Threshold
Warning) exceeded
E
POSSIBLE CAUSE
AV control unit
FAIL-SAFE F
—
G
CONSULT
3. Check DTC.
Is DTC U12AF detected? I

CONSULT L
2. Erase DTC.
4. Check DTC.
Is DTC U12AF detected?

U12B0 POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Supply Voltage Goes below 9V > Signal (terminal) —
20s
U12B0 Lower operation threshold of supply voltage
(Supply Voltage Goes below 9V > Threshold
20s) exceeded
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Charging system malfunction
• AV control unit power supply or ground circuits
• AV control unit
FAIL-SAFE
—
CONSULT
3. Check DTC.
Is DTC U12B0 detected?
1.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUITS

Perform the AV control unit power supply and ground circuit diagnosis procedure. Refer to AV-213, "AV CON-
TROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure".

A

Supply Voltage Goes High > 16V Signal (terminal) —
for 20s
U12B1 Upper operation threshold of supply voltage D
(Supply Voltage Goes High > 16V Threshold
for 20s) exceeded
E
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• AV control unit F
FAIL-SAFE
—
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE G

CONSULT H
3. Check DTC. I
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-54, "Intermittent Incident". J
1.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUITS L

AV

U1300 AV COMM CIRCUIT
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC No. (Trouble diagnosis content) DTC detection condition

AV comm circuits are shorted to ground
Signal (terminal)
1 (terminals 31, 32, 38, and 39)
Threshold AV comm circuits are shorted to ground
AV COMM CIRCUIT Diagnosis delay time 2 seconds or more

U1300
(AV comm circuit error) Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.
AV comm circuits are open (terminals 31,
Signal (terminal)
2 32, 38, and 39)
Threshold AV comm circuits are open
Diagnosis delay time 2 seconds or more
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Harness or connector (AV comm circuits are open or short)
FAIL SAFE
—
CONSULT
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more.
5. Check DTC.
1.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT FOR METER M&A

CONSULT
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “METER M&A”.
YES >> Refer to MWI-32, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK AV COMMUNICATION LOW CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M102 and combination meter connector M77.

3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M102 and combination meter connector M77.
A
AV control unit Combination meter
Continuity
B
31
M102 M77 47 Yes
38
4. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M102 and ground. C
AV control unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal D
31
M102 — No
38
E
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. F
3.CHECK AV COMMUNICATION HIGH CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
G

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal H
32
M102 M77 48 Yes
39
2. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M102 and ground. I
AV control unit
Ground Continuity J
Connector Terminal
32
M102 — No
39 K
AV

U1310 CONTROL UNIT (AV)
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONTROL UNIT (AV) Signal (terminal) –

U1310
(AV control unit initialization error) Threshold –
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• AV control unit
FAIL SAFE
—
CONSULT
5. Check DTC.
YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-239, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-54, "Intermittent Incident".

A
AV CONTROL UNIT
AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000015258673
B

C
1.CHECK FUSE
Check that the following fuses are not blown: D

E

Are the fuses blown? F
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT G
2. Disconnect AV control unit connectors M101 and M102.
3. Check voltage between AV control unit connectors M101 and M102 and ground. H

Ground Condition
Connector Terminal (Approx.) I
M101 19 Ignition switch: OFF
— Battery voltage
M102 40 Ignition switch: ON
J
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. K
2. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M101 and ground. L
AV control unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal M
M101 20 — Yes
AV
O

FRONT TWEETER
FRONT TWEETER
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
Check the AV control unit and speaker connectors for the following:
• Damage
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FRONT TWEETER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Disconnect AV control unit connector M101 and suspect front tweeter connector.
2. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M101 and suspect front tweeter connector.
AV control unit Front tweeter

Continuity
2 1
M80 (LH)
3 2
M101 Yes
11 1
M23 (RH)
12 2
AV control unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
2
3
M101 — No
11
12
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK FRONT TWEETER SIGNAL
1. Connect AV control unit connector M101 and suspect front tweeter connector.
3. Push AV control unit POWER switch.
4. Check signal between the terminals of AV control unit connector M101.
AV control unit connector M101

Terminal Terminal

FRONT TWEETER
2 3
A
Audio signal output

11 12 B
SKIB3609E
C
D
AV

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
• Damage
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FRONT DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Disconnect AV control unit connector M101 and suspect front door speaker connector.
2. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M101 and suspect front door speaker connector.
AV control unit Front door speaker

Continuity
2 1
D7 (LH)
3 2
M101 Yes
11 1
D104 (RH)
12 2
AV control unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
2
3
M101 — No
11
12
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK FRONT DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL
1. Connect AV control unit connector M101 and suspect front door speaker connector.

Terminal Terminal

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
2 3
A
Audio signal output

11 12 B
SKIB3609E
C
D
AV

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
• Damage
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK REAR DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Disconnect AV control unit connector M101 and suspect rear door speaker connector.
2. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M101 and suspect rear door speaker connector.
AV control unit Rear door speaker

Continuity
4 1
D203 (LH)
5 2
M101 Yes
13 1
D303 (RH)
14 2
AV control unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
4
5
M101 — No
13
14
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK REAR DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL
1. Connect AV control unit connector M101 and suspect rear door speaker connector.

Terminal Terminal

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
4 5
A
Audio signal output

13 14 B
SKIB3609E
C
D
AV

1.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN AV CONTROL UNIT AND MICROPHONE

2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M102 and microphone connector R8.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M102 and microphone connector R8.
AV control unit Microphone

Continuity
24 3
34 1
M102 R8 Yes
35 4
36 2
AV control unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
24
M102 34 — No
35
YES >> GO TO 2.
1. Connect AV control unit connector M102 and microphone connector R8.
Microphone Ground
Voltage
(+)
(-) (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
R8 4 — 5V
YES >> GO TO 3.
Check signal between terminals of AV control unit connector M102.

AV control unit connector M102 A

Terminal Terminal
B
C
D
PKIB5037J

YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-239, "Removal and Installation". E
AV

STEERING SWITCH
STEERING SWITCH


Condition
Depress switch. 52
Depress switch. 134

25
Depress DISPLAY BACK switch. 654
19 1
Depress switch.
Depress switch. 52
Depress switch. 134

18
Depress switch. 264

YES >> GO TO 2.

Continuity
22 8
M76 23 M30 15 Yes
21 14

STEERING SWITCH
Combination meter A
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
22
B
M76 23 — No
21
Is the inspection result normal? C
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH D

E
Combination switch
Continuity
25 8 F
M90 18 M30 15 Yes
19 14
G
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace spiral cable. Refer to SR-16, "Removal and Installation". H
4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN COMBINATION METER AND AV CONTROL UNIT
1. Disconnect combination meter connector M77 and AV control unit connector M102.
2. Check continuity between combination meter connector M77 and AV control unit connector M102. I
Combination meter AV control unit

Continuity J
47 31
M77 M102 Yes
48 32 K
Combination meter L
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
47
M77 — No M
48
YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-239, "Removal and Installation". AV

USB CONNECTOR
USB CONNECTOR

2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M138 and USB interface connector M89.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M138 and USB interface connector M89.
AV control unit USB interface

Continuity
45 1
46 2
M138 47 M89 3 Yes
49 5
50 6
AV control unit
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
45
M138 Ground No
47

A
B
C
1.CHECK AUX IN JACK HARNESS CONTINUITY
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M102 and AUX in jack connector M104. D
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M102 and AUX in jack connector M104.
AV control unit AUX in jack E

Continuity
21 2
F
M102 22 M104 3 Yes
23 1
4. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M102 and ground. G
AV control unit
— Continuity
21
M102 Ground No
23
I
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. J
AV

MULTI AV SYSTEM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [NAVIGATION WITHOUT BOSE]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
MULTI AV SYSTEM
RELATED TO AUDIO

Malfunction in AV control unit.
The disk cannot be removed. AV control unit Refer to AV-168, "On Board Diagnosis
Function".
• AV control unit power supply and ground
circuits malfunction.
Refer to AV-213, "AV CONTROL UNIT :
Diagnosis Procedure".
AV control unit and speaker.
Refer to:
tweeter).
sound is low. door speaker).
Only a certain speaker (front tweeter LH, - AV-218, "Diagnosis Procedure" (rear
front tweeter RH, front door speaker LH, door speaker).
front door speaker RH, rear door speaker • Malfunction in speaker.
LH, rear door speaker RH) does not output Refer to:
sound. - AV-243, "Removal and Installation" (front
tweeter).
door speaker).
door speaker).
• Malfunction in AV control unit.
Function".

MULTI AV SYSTEM
A
Noise comes out from all speakers. Refer to AV-168, "On Board Diagnosis
Function".
• Poor connector connection of speaker. B
AV control unit and speaker.
Refer to:
C
tweeter).
door speaker). D
Noise comes out only from a certain speak- door speaker).
er (front tweeter LH, front tweeter RH, front • Malfunction in speaker.
door speaker LH, front door speaker RH, • Poor Installation of speaker (e.g. back- E
Noise is mixed with audio.
rear door speaker LH, rear door speaker lash and looseness).
RH). Refer to:
tweeter). F
door speaker).
door speaker). G
Function".
H
antenna feeder.
roads) I
Feeder".
• Any radio station cannot be received or Poor connector connection of antenna or
No radio reception or poor reception.
poor reception is caused even after mov- antenna feeder. J
ing to a service area with good reception Refer to AV-161, "Antenna and Antenna
(e.g. a place with clear view and no ob- Feeder".
K
• Malfunction in antenna, antenna feeder
or AV control unit. Perform DTC diagno-
sis.
There is malfunction in the CONSULT self Refer to AV-203, "Diagnosis Procedure". L
diagnosis result. • Poor continuity in antenna feeder.
Refer to AV-169, "CONSULT Function". • Poor connector connection of antenna or
antenna feeder.
Refer to AV-161, "Antenna and Antenna M
No satellite radio reception. Feeder".
• Poor connector connection of antenna or AV
There is no malfunction in the CONSULT antenna feeder.
self diagnosis result. • Loose satellite radio antenna mounting
Refer to AV-169, "CONSULT Function". nut.
Refer to AV-161, "Antenna and Antenna O
Feeder".
Buzz/rattle sound from speaker BLE DIAGNOSIS" in the appropriate interi- P
or trim section.

the vehicle.

MULTI AV SYSTEM
Check Compatibility
NOTE:
3. Write down the customer’s phone brand, model and service provider.
NOTE:
any further action.
Perform diagnosis as per the following table:

play at the guide).
established. Malfunction in AV control unit.
Hands-free phone cannot be established. • Hands-free phone operation can be per- Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-239,
formed, however, voice between each "Removal and Installation".
sation.
work, but does not work.
and do not work.
RELATED TO NAVIGATION

MULTI AV SYSTEM
A
• Malfunction in SD card.
Navigation malfunction.
Function". B
Steering switch signal circuit malfunction.
Navigation system is inoperative. Steering switches malfunction.
Microphone signal circuit malfunction. C
Voice activated control malfunction.
D
AV

RELATED TO NOISE
etc.).
external noise from trains and other sources. It is not a malfunction:
NOTE:

A cracking or snapping sound occurs with the op- • Relay malfunction, AV control unit malfunc-
Noise only occurs when various eration of various switches. tion
ing. • Motor

lowing conditions:
NOTE:

A
call.
RELATED TO NAVIGATION C
Basic Operation
D
Symptom Cause Remedy
No image is shown. Display brightness adjustment is set fully to DARK Adjust the display brightness.
side.
E
No guide sound is heard. Volume control is set to OFF, MIN or MAX. Adjust the audio guide volume.
Audio guide volume is too low or
Audio guidance is not available while the vehicle is System is not malfunctioning.
too high.
driving on a dark pink route.
F
Screen is too dark. Temperature inside the vehicle is low. Wait until the temperature inside the vehicle
Motion of the image is too slow. reaches the proper temperature.
Small black or bright spots appear Symptom peculiar to a liquid crystal display (dis- System is not malfunction. G
on the screen. play unit).
Vehicle Mark
H
Map screen and BIRDVIEW™ Some thinning of the character data is done to pre- System is not malfunctioning.
Name of the place vary with the vent the display becoming to complex. In some I
screen. cases and in some locations, the display contents
may differ.
The same place name, street name, etc. may not
be displayed every time on account of the data J
processing.
Vehicle mark is not positioned cor- Vehicle is transferred by ferry or by towing after its Drive the vehicle for a while in the GPS sat-
rectly. ignition switch is turned to OFF. ellite signal receiving condition. K
Screen will not switch to nighttime The daytime screen is selected by the “SWITCH Perform screen dimming and select the
mode after the lighting switch is SCREENS” when the last time the screen dim- nighttime screen by “SWITCH SCREENS”.
turned ON. ming setting is done.
Switching between daytime/nighttime screen may L
be inhibited by the automatic illumination adjust-
ment function.
Map screen will not scroll in accor- Current location is not displayed. Press “MAP” button to display the current lo- M
dance with the vehicle travel. cation.
Vehicle mark will not be shown. Current location is not displayed. Press “MAP” button to display the current lo-
cation. AV
Accuracy indicator (GPS satellite GPS satellite signal is intercepted because the ve- Move the vehicle out to an open space.
mark) on the map screen stays hicle is in or behind a building.
gray.
GPS satellite signal cannot be received because Do not place anything on top of the meter dis- O
an obstacle is placed on top of the instrument pan- play (instrument panel).
el.
GPS satellites are not visible from current location. Wait until GPS satellites are visible by mov-
P
ing the vehicle.

Vehicle location accuracy is low. Accuracy indicator (GPS satellite mark) on the Current location is not determined.
map screen stays gray.
Vehicle speed setting by the vehicle speed pulse Drive the vehicle for a while [for approx. 30
has been deviated (advanced or retarded) from minutes at approx. 30 km/h (19 MPH)] and
the actual vehicle speed because tire chain is fit- the deviation will be automatically adjusted. If
ted or the system has been used on another vehi- advancement or retard still occur, perform
cle. the distance adjustment by CONFIRMA-
TION/ADJUSTMENT mode of diagnosis
function.
Map data has error or omission. (Vehicle mark is As a rule, an updated map DVD–ROM will be
always deviated to the same position.) released once a year.
Destination, Passing Points and Menu Items Cannot be Selected/Set

Destination cannot be set. Destination to be set is on an expressway. Set the destination on an ordinary road.
Passing point is not searched The vehicle has already passed the passing point, To include the passing points that have been
when re-searching the route. or the system judged so. passed into the route again, set the route
again.
Route information will not be dis- Route searching has not been done. Set the destination and perform route
played. searching.
Vehicle mark is not on the recommended route. Drive on the recommended route.
Route guide is turned OFF. Turn route guide ON.
Route information is not available on the dark pink System is not malfunctioning.
route.
After the route searching, no guide Vehicle mark is not on the recommended route. Drive on the recommended route.
sign will appear as the vehicle (On the display, only guide signs related to the rec-
goes near the entrance/exit to the ommended route will be shown.)
toll road.
Automatic route searching is not Vehicle is driving on a highway (gray route), or no Drive on a road to be searched. Or re–search
possible. recommended route is available. the route manually. In this case, however, the
whole route will be searched.
Performed automatic detour Performed search with every conditions consid- System is not malfunctioning.
search (or detour search). Howev- ered. However, the result is the same as that of the
er, the result is the same as that of previous search.
the previous search.
Passing points cannot be set. More than five passing points were set. Passing points can be set up to five. To stop
at more than five points, perform sharing in
several steps.
When setting the route, the starting The current vehicle location is always set as the System is not malfunctioning.
point cannot be selected. starting point of a route.
Some menu items cannot be se- The vehicle is being driven. Stop the vehicle at a safe place and then op-
lected. erate the system.
Voice Guide

Symptom Cause Remedy A

Voice guide will not operate. Note: Voice guide is only available at intersections System is not malfunctioning.
that satisfy certain conditions (indicated by z on
the map). Therefore, guidance may not be given
B
even when the route on the map changes direction.
The vehicle is not on the recommended route. Return to the recommended route or re-
search the route.
C
Voice guide is turned OFF. Turn voice guide ON.
Voice guide does not match the ac- Voice guide may vary with the direction to which Drive in conformity to the actual traffic rules. D
tual road pattern. the vehicle is turn and the connection of the road to
other roads.
Route Search E

No route is shown. No road to be searched is found around the des- Find wider road (orange road or wider) near- F
tination. by and reset the destination and passing
points onto it. Take care of the traveling direc-
tion when there are separate up and down
roads. G
Starting point and the destination are too close. Set the destination at more distant point.
Conditional traffic regulation (day of the week/ Turn the time-regulating search conditions
time of the day) is set at the area around the cur- OFF. Turn “Avoid regulation time” in the H
rent location or the destination. search conditions OFF.
Indicated route is intermittent. In some areas, highways (gray routes) are not System is not malfunctioning.
used for the search(Note)Therefore, the route to I
the current location or the passing points may be
intermittent.
When the vehicle has passed the A recommended route is controlled by each sec- System is not malfunctioning. J
recommended route, it is deleted tion. When the vehicle has passed the passing
from the screen. point 1, then the map data from the starting point
up to the passing point 1 will be deleted. (The data
may remain undeleted in some area.) K
Detouring route is recommended. In some areas, highways (gray routes) are not Set the route closer to the basic route (gray
used for the search. (Note). Therefore, detour route).
route may be recommended. L
A detour route may be shown when some traffic Slightly move the starting point or the destina-
regulation (one-way traffic, etc.) is set at the area tion, or set the passing point on the route of
around the starting point or the destination. your choice.
M
In the area where highways (gray routes) are System is not malfunctioning.
used for the search, left turn has priority around
the current location and the destination (passing
points). For this reason, the recommended route AV
may be detouring.
Landmarks on the map do not This can be happen due to omission or error in As a rule, an updated map DVD-ROM will be
match the actual ones. the map data. released once a year. Wait until the latest O
map has become available.
Recommended route is far from Starting point, passing points, and destination of Reset the destination onto the road nearby. If
the starting point, passing points, the route guide were set far from the desired this road is one of the highways (gray routes),
P
and destination. points because route searching data around an ordinary road nearby may be displayed as
these area were not stored. the recommended route.
NOTE:
Except for the ordinance-designated cities. (Malfunctioning areas may be changed in the updated map disc.)
Examples of Current-Location Mark Displacement

Vehicle's travel amount is calculated by reading its travel distance and turning angle. Therefore, if the vehicle
is driven in the following manner, an error will occur in the vehicle's current location display. If correct location
has not been restored after driving the vehicle for a while, perform location correction.
SEL698V

Cause (condition) –: While driving ooo: Display Driving condition Remarks (correction, etc.) A
Y–intersections
At a Y intersection or similar gradual divi-

sion of roads, an error in the direction of B
travel deduced by the sensor may result in
the current-location mark appearing on the
wrong road.
C
ELK0192D
Spiral roads
D
When driving on a large, continuous spiral
road (such as loop bridge), turning angle
error is accumulated and the vehicle mark
E
may deviate from the correct location.
ELK0193D
Straight roads
F
When driving on a long, straight road and
slow curve without stopping, map-matching
does not work effectively enough and dis-
tance errors may accumulate. As a result,
G
the vehicle mark may deviate from the cor-
rect location when the vehicle is turned at a
If after travelling about 10 km (6
corner. H
miles) the correct location has
Road config- ELK0194D
not been restored, perform lo-
uration Zigzag roads cation correction and, if neces-
sary, direction correction.
When driving on a zigzag road, the map I
may be matched to other roads in the simi-
lar direction nearby at every turn, and the
vehicle mark may deviate from the correct
location. J
ELK0195D
Roads laid out in a grid pattern K

When driving where roads are laid out in a
grid pattern, or where many roads are run-
ning in the similar direction nearby, the map
may be matched to them by mistake and L
rect location.
ELK0196D
M
Parallel roads
When two roads are running in parallel

(such as highway and sideway), the map AV
may be matched to the other road by mis-
take and the vehicle mark may deviate from
the correct location.
O
ELK0197D

Cause (condition) –: While driving ooo: Display Driving condition Remarks (correction, etc.)
In a parking lot When driving in a parking lot, or other loca-
tion where there are no roads on the map,
matching may place the vehicle mark on a
nearby road. When the vehicle returns to
the road, the vehicle mark may have devi-
ated from the correct location.
When driving in circle or turning the steer-
ing wheel repeatedly, direction errors accu-
SEL709V
mulate, and the vehicle mark may deviate
from the correct location.
Turntable
When the ignition switch is OFF, the navi-
gation system cannot get the signal from
the gyroscope (angular speed sensor).
Place Therefore, the displayed direction may be
wrong and the correct road may not be eas-
ily returned to after rotating the vehicle on a
turntable with the ignition OFF.
SEL710V
Slippery roads On snow, wet roads, gravel, or other roads

where tires may slip easily, accumulated
mileage errors may cause the vehicle mark If after travelling about 10 km (6
to deviate from the correct road. miles) the correct location has
Slopes When parking in sloped garages, when
cation correction and, if neces-
travelling on banked roads, or in other cas-
es where the vehicle turns when tilted, an
error in the turning angle will occur, and the
vehicle mark may deviate from the road.
Road not displayed on the map screen
When driving on new roads or other roads
not displayed on the map screen, map
matching does not function correctly and
matches the location to a nearby road.
When the vehicle returns to a road which is
on the map, the vehicle mark may deviate
from the correct road.
SEL699V
Map data Different road pattern

(Changed due to repair)
If the road pattern stored in the map data
and the actual road pattern are different,
map matching does not function correctly
and matches the location to a nearby road.
The vehicle mark may deviate from the cor-
rect road.
ELK0201D
Drive the vehicle for a while. If

the distance still deviates, ad-
When tire chains are used, the mileage is
just it by using the distance ad-
Vehicle Use of tire chains not correctly detected, and the vehicle mark
justment function. (If the tire
may deviate from the correct road.
chain is removed, recover the
original value.)

A
If the vehicle is driven just after the engine
is started when the gyroscope (angular
Wait for a short while before
Just after the engine is started speed sensor) correction is not completed,
driving after starting the engine.
the vehicle can lose its direction and may B
have deviated from the correct location.
Continuous driving without stopping When driving long distances without stop-
Precautions ping, direction errors may accumulate, and
for driving the current-location mark may deviate from
Stop and adjust the orientation. C
the correct road.
Abusive driving Spinning the wheels or engaging in other If after travelling about 10 km (6
kinds of abusive driving may result in the miles) the correct location has D
system being unable perform correct detec- not been restored, perform lo-
tion, and may cause the vehicle mark to de- cation correction and, if neces-
viate from the correct road. sary, direction correction.
E
Position correction accuracy
Enter in the road displayed on
If the accuracy of location settings is poor, the screen with an accuracy of
accuracy may be reduced when the correct approx. 1mm. F
road cannot be found, particularly in places Caution: Whenever possible,
where there are many roads. use detailed map for the correc-
tion.
G
How to cor- SEL701V
rect location Direction when location is corrected

H
If the accuracy of location settings during
correction is poor, accuracy may be re- Perform direction correction.
duced afterwards.
I
SEL702V
Location Correction by Map-Matching is Slow J

• The map-matching function needs to refer to the data of the surrounding area. It is necessary to drive some
distance for the function to work.
• Because map-matching operates on this principle, when there are many roads running in similar directions K
in the surrounding area, no matching determination may be made. The location may not be corrected until
some special feature is found.
Name of Road is Not Displayed L
The current road name may not be displayed if there are no road names displayed on the map screen.
Contents of Display Differ for Birdview™ and the (Flat) Map Screen
Difference of the BIRDVIEW™ screen from the flat map screen are as follows. M
• The current place name displays names which are primarily in the direction of vehicle travel.
• The amount of time before the vehicle travel or turn angle is updated on the screen is longer than for the
(flat) map display. AV
• The conditions for display of place names, roads, and other data are different for nearby areas and for more
distant areas.
• Some thinning of the character data is done to prevent the display becoming too complex. In some cases
and in some locations, the display contents may differ. O
• The same place name, street name, etc. may be displayed multiple times.
Vehicle Mark Shows a Position Which is Completely Wrong
In the following cases, the vehicle mark may appear on completely different position in the map depending on P
the GPS satellite signal receiving conditions. In this case, perform location correction and direction correction:
• When location correction has not been done
- If the receiving conditions of the GPS satellite signal is poor, if the vehicle mark becomes out of place, it may
move to a completely different location and not come back if location correction is not done. The position will
be corrected if the GPS signal can be received.
• When the vehicle has traveled by ferry, or when the vehicle has been being towed

- Because calculation of the current location cannot be done when traveling with the ignition off, for example
when traveling by ferry or when being towed, the location before travel is displayed. If the precise location
can be detected with GPS, the location will be corrected.
Vehicle Mark Jumps
In the following cases, the vehicle mark may appear to jump as a result of automatic correction of the current
location:
• When map matching has been done
- If the current location and the vehicle mark are different when map matching is done, the vehicle mark may
seem to jump. At this time, the location may be “corrected” to the wrong road or to a location which is not on
a road.
• When GPS location correction has been done
- If the current location and the vehicle mark are different when the location is corrected using GPS measure-
ments, the vehicle mark may seem to jump. At this time, the location may be “corrected” to a location which
is not on a road.
Vehicle Mark is in a River or Sea
The navigation system moves the vehicle mark with no distinction between land and rivers or sea. If the vehi-
cle mark is somehow out of place, it may appear that the vehicle is driving in a river or the sea.
Vehicle Mark Automatically Rotates
The system wrongly memorizes the rotating status as stopping when the ignition switch is turned ON with the
turntable rotating. That causes the vehicle mark to rotate when the vehicle is stopped.
When Driving on Same Road, Sometimes Vehicle Mark is in Right Place and Sometimes it is in Wrong Place
The conditions of the GPS antenna (GPS data) and gyroscope (angular speed sensor) change gradually.
Depending on the road traveled and the operation of the steering wheel, the location detection results will be
different. Therefore, even on a road on which the location has never been wrong, conditions may cause the
vehicle mark to deviate.

AV CONTROL UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [NAVIGATION WITHOUT BOSE]
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A

AV CONTROL UNIT
B
AWNIA3339ZZ J
1. AV control unit bracket (LH) 2. AV control unit 3. AV control unit bracket (RH)

K
REMOVAL
CAUTION: L
• Before disconnecting the AV control unit and battery terminals, turn the ignition switch OFF and wait
at least 30 seconds.
• Before replacing AV control unit, perform “READ CONFIGURATION” to save current vehicle specifi- M
cation. Refer to AV-190, "CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Description".
NOTE:
Therefore, data corruption may occur if battery voltage is cut off within 30 seconds. AV
1. Disconnect the battery. Refer to PG-128, "Battery Disconnect".
O
5. Remove the AV control unit screws, then pull out the AV control unit. P
6. Disconnect the harness connectors from the AV control unit and remove.
7. Remove the AV control unit bracket (LH/RH) screws and the AV control unit brackets (LH/RH) (if neces-
sary).
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:

AV CONTROL UNIT
• When replacing AV control unit, perform "WRITE CONFIGURATION". Refer to AV-189, "ADDITIONAL
SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AV CONTROL UNIT : Description".
• When replacing AV control unit, the AV control unit must be registered. Refer to AV-189, "ADDI-
TIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AV CONTROL UNIT : Description".

STEERING SWITCHES
STEERING SWITCHES
A
I
ALOIA0584ZZ
K
REMOVAL
NOTE:
L
M
: Pawl
AV
ALOIA0575ZZ

STEERING SWITCHES
: Pawl
ALOIA0576ZZ
INSTALLATION

FRONT TWEETER
FRONT TWEETER
A
REMOVAL B
: Pawl
: Front
remove.
ALNIA1663ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
G
AV

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
ALNIA1580ZZ
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
A
I
ALNIA1581ZZ
K
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
AV

REMOVAL
ALNIA1582ZZ
INSTALLATION

MICROPHONE
MICROPHONE
A
REMOVAL B
D
ALNIA1583ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
G
AV

GPS ANTENNA
GPS ANTENNA
REMOVAL
1. Remove instrument panel assembly. Refer to IP-14, "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY : Removal and
Installation".
2. Remove screw and the GPS antenna.
INSTALLATION

ANTENNA BASE
ANTENNA BASE
A
AWNIA4563ZZ
G

H
REMOVAL
I
J
INSTALLATION K
CAUTION:
M
DISASSEMBLY
AWNIA4564ZZ
ASSEMBLY

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [NAVIGATION WITH BOSE]
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING:
see the SR section.
ness connectors.
WARNING:
Unit) INFOID:0000000014844439
CAUTION:
Remove battery terminal and AV control unit 30 seconds or more after turning the ignition switch OFF.
NOTE:

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [NAVIGATION WITH BOSE]
PKIA0306E
D
G
PKIA0307E

H
- Oily dirt:
area.

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [NAVIGATION WITH BOSE]
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
(TechMate No.)
Tool name
(J-46534)
Trim Tool Set
AWJIA0483ZZ

PIIB1407E

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [NAVIGATION WITH BOSE]
COMPONENT PARTS
B
L
ALNIA2038ZZ

AM/FM antenna)
2. Subwoofer AV
3. Rear door speaker RH
4. BOSE® speaker amp. Refer to AV-254, "BOSE Speaker Amp.".
O
6. Front tweeter RH
7. USB interface and AUX in jack Refer to AV-256, "USB Interface and AUX In Jack". P
9. Center speaker
11. Front tweeter LH

COMPONENT PARTS
• A 7-inch WVGA display, an AM/FM electronic tuner radio, CD drive

and navigation unit are integrated into the AV control unit.
panel functions.
separate USB interface.
*
: iPod® is a registered trademark of Apple, Inc. All rights reserved.
ALNIA1590ZZ
BOSE Speaker Amp. INFOID:0000000015258718
• Installed under the rear of the front passenger seat.

• Receives sound signal from AV control unit, and outputs sound sig-
nal to each tweeter, speaker and the subwoofer.
ALNIA1596ZZ
FRONT TWEETER
instrument panel.
• Sound signals are input from the Bose speaker amp. to output high
range sounds.
ALNIA1586ZZ
CENTER SPEAKER

COMPONENT PARTS
• 7.6 cm (3 in) speaker is installed in the top center of the instrument
panel. A
• Sound signals are input from the Bose speaker amp. to output mid
range sounds.
B
ALNIA1588ZZ
D
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
doors.
• Sound signals are input from the Bose speaker amp. to output low E
range sounds.
ALNIA1587ZZ
REAR DOOR SPEAKER H

• 12.7 cm (5 in) speakers are installed in the bottom of the rear
doors.
• Sound signals are input from the Bose speaker amp. to output
I
high, mid and low range sounds.
K
ALNIA1589ZZ
SUBWOOFER
• Installed on top of the spare tire underneath the spare tire cover. L
range sounds.
M
AV
ALNIA1597ZZ
O

COMPONENT PARTS
USB Interface and AUX In Jack INFOID:0000000015258720

• iPod® and USB memory can be connected to the AV control unit
through the USB interface.
• An external audio device can be connected to the AV control unit
ALNIA1841ZZ

• Switches are connected to the combination meter.
• Combination meter is connected to the AV control unit via AV com-
munication.
ALNIA2039ZZ

• The power is supplied from the AV control unit.
ALNIA2040ZZ
Combination Meter INFOID:0000000015258723

• Combination meter sends the steering switch signals to the audio
ALNIA2041ZZ
GPS ANTENNA

COMPONENT PARTS
• GPS antenna is installed in the instrument panel.
• Power is supplied from the AV control unit. A
• This antenna amplifies radio waves received from the GPS satel-
lite and transmits the GPS signal to the AV control unit.
NOTE:
B
An object on the instrument panel may cause the reception sensitiv-
ity to be decreased.
JSNIA5132ZZ
D
ROOF ANTENNA
of the roof.
• It receives radio waves and outputs them to AV control unit. E
• It receives satellite radio waves and outputs them to AV control
unit.
• Antenna amp. is integral to the roof antenna. F
G
ALNIA2043ZZ
H
AWNIA4565GB
M

AV

COMPONENT PARTS
ALNIA2044ZZ
1. M503 2. M502 3. M130, M501

4. M129, M500 5. M142 6. M139
7. M141
SD Card INFOID:0000000015258725
• Map data is memorized in the SD card.

• Map data is sent to the AV control unit from the SD slot.

SYSTEM
SYSTEM
A
SYSTEM DIAGRAM B
G
AWNIA4584GB
AUDIO SYSTEM
The audio system consists of the following component: H
• AV control unit
• Front tweeters I
• Center speaker
• Subwoofer J
• USB interface
• AUX in jack
• Steering switches K
amp. and sent to the AV control unit. The AV control unit sends the audio signals to the Bose speaker amp.
L
The Bose speaker amp. then sends the audio signals to the tweeters, speakers and subwoofer.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM M
Description
• The navigation system can be operated by control panel of the AV control unit and display (touch panel) of
the AV control unit. AV
• Guide sound during the operation of the navigation system is output from AV control unit to front tweeters.
• AV control unit calculates the vehicle location based on the signals from GYRO (angle speed sensor), vehi-
cle sensor, and GPS satellite, as well as the map data from map SD-card. The vehicle location is displayed
on the AV control unit. O
POSITION DETECTION PRINCIPLE

The navigation system periodically calculates the vehicle's current position according to the following three
P
signals:
• Travel distance of the vehicle as determined by the vehicle speed sensor
• Turning angle of the vehicle as determined by the gyroscope (angular velocity sensor)
• Direction of vehicle travel as determined by the GPS antenna (GPS information)
The current position of the vehicle is then identified by comparing the calculated vehicle position with map data
read from the map SD-card (map-matching), and indicated on the screen as a vehicle mark. More accurate
data is judged and used by comparing vehicle position detection results found by the GPS with the result by
map-matching.

SYSTEM
The current vehicle position will be calculated by detecting the dis-

tance the vehicle moved from the previous calculation point and its
direction.
• Travel distance
Travel distance calculations are based on the vehicle speed sen-
sor input signal. Therefore, the calculation may become incorrect
as the tires wear down. To prevent this, an automatic distance cor-
rection function has been adopted.
• Travel direction
Change in the travel direction of the vehicle is calculated by a gyro-
scope (angular velocity sensor) and a GPS antenna (GPS informa-
SEL684V
tion). They have both advantages and disadvantages.
Type Advantage Disadvantage

Gyroscope Can detect the vehicle's turning angle quite Direction errors may accumulate when vehicle is
(angular velocity sensor) accurately. driven for long distances without stopping.
GPS antenna Can detect the vehicle's travel direction Correct direction cannot be detected when vehicle
(GPS information) (North/South/East/West). speed is low.
More accurate traveling direction is detected because priorities are set for the signals from these two
devices according to the situation.
MAP-MATCHING
Map-matching compares a current location detected by the method
in the “Location Detection Principle” with a road map data from map
SD-card.
NOTE:
The road map data is based on data stored in the map SD-card.
SEL685V
The vehicle position may not be corrected under the following circumstances and after driving for a certain
time when GPS information is difficult to receive. In this case, the vehicle mark on the display must be cor-
rected manually:
• In map-matching, alternative routes to reach the destination will be
shown and prioritized, after the road on which the vehicle is cur-
rently driven has been judged and the vehicle mark has been repo-
sitioned.
Alternative routes will be shown in different order of priority, and
the incorrect road can be avoided if there is an error in distance
and/or direction.
Routes are of the same priority if two roads are running in parallel.
Therefore, the vehicle mark may appear on either of them alter-
nately, depending on maneuvering of the steering wheel and con-
figuration of the road.
SEL686V

SYSTEM
• Map-matching does not function correctly when a road on which
the vehicle is driving is new and not recorded in the map SD-card, A
or when road pattern stored in the map data and the actual road
pattern are different due to repair.
The map-matching function may find another road and position the
B
vehicle mark on it when driving on a road not present in the map.
Then, the vehicle mark may change to it when the correct road is
detected.
• Effective range for comparing the vehicle position and travel direc- C
tion calculated by the distance and direction with the road data
read from the map SD-card is limited. Therefore, correction by
SKIA0613E
map-matching is not possible when there is an excessive gap D
between current vehicle position and the position on the map.
GPS (Global Positioning System)
GPS (Global Positioning System) is developed for and is controlled E
by the US Department of Defense. The system utilizes GPS satel-
lites (NAVSTAR), transmitting out radio waves while flying on an orbit
around the earth at an altitude of approximately 21,000 km (13,049
mile). F
The receiver calculates the travel position in three dimensions (lati-
tude/longitude/altitude) according to the time lag of the radio waves
that four or more GPS satellites transmit (three-dimensional position- G
ing). The GPS receiver calculates the travel position in two dimen-
sions (latitude/longitude) with the previous altitude data if the GPS
receiver receives only three radio waves (two-dimensional position-
ing). GPS position correction is not performed while stopping the
SEL526V H
vehicle.
Accuracy of the GPS will deteriorate under the following conditions: I

• In two-dimensional positioning, GPS accuracy will deteriorate when altitude of the vehicle position changes.
• The position of GPS satellite affects GPS detection precision. The position detection may not be precisely
performed. J
• The position detection is not performed if GPS receiver does not receive radio waves from GPS satellites.
(Inside a tunnel, parking in a building, under an elevated highway etc.) GPS receiver may not receive radio
waves from GPS satellites if any object is placed on the GPS antenna.
NOTE: K
• The detection result has an error of approximately 10 m (32.81 ft) even with a high-precision three dimen-
sional positioning.
• There may be cases when the accuracy is lowered and radio waves are stopped intentionally because the L
GPS satellite signal is controlled by the US trace control center.
USB INTERFACE
• iPod® or music files in USB memory can be played. M
• Sound signals are transmitted from USB interface to the AV control unit and output to each speaker.
• iPod® is recharged when connected to USB interface.
AV
AUX IN JACK
• Sound can be output from an external device by connecting a device to the AUX in jack.
• AUX sound signals are transmitted to each speaker via AV control unit.
O
• Volume level of this system goes up and down automatically in proportion to the vehicle speed.
• The control level can be selected by the customer. P
• Bluetooth® control is built into AV control unit.
• The connection between cellular phone and AV control unit is performed with Bluetooth® communication.
• The voice guidance signal is input from the AV control unit and output to the front speakers when operating
the cellular phone.

SYSTEM
• Spoken voice sound output from the microphone (microphone signal) is input to AV control unit.
• AV control unit outputs to cellular phone with Bluetooth® communication as a TEL voice signal.
• TEL voice signal is input to AV control unit by establishing Bluetooth® communication from cellular phone,
and the signal is output to front speakers.

A
The AV control unit on board diagnosis performs the functions listed in the table below: B
Mode Item Content

Version data of the AV control unit is dis- C
Version —
played.
Allows correction of the position detec-
User Configuration Touch Display Calibration —
tion accuracy of the touch panel.
D
FM monitor — Monitors the dynamic values of the cur-
Radio
AM monitor — rent tuner
SXM monitor — Version data is displayed. E

• SD card slot Access
• Power Supply
• Speed Signal F
• Direction Signal
• Illumination Signal
• GPS Antenna
• GPS Tracking G
• Satellites Visible
Running System Status • Satellites Tracked The current system status is displayed.
• Microphone Current
• Steering wheel key H
• Radio Antenna
• SXM Antenna
• USB Device
I
System State • iPod® firmware version
• BT Status
Speaker Test 4kHz This activates a sequence of test tone
— outputs to the audio circuits one after the J
Speaker Test 100Hz other for 1 second.
This provides a test sequence where
test displays (plain colored display: e.g. K
white, black, red, blue, green) are shown
one after the other.
The respective color is shown for an in-
Display-Test — L
dicated period of time (parameter). After
the display test, the design of the display
previously available is stored. While the
screen shows a plain colored display, a
pixel malfunction may be detected. M
• SD Card Access
• BT Module Access
A system self test is executed and the
Self Test • Radio Antenna AV
results are stored into the error memory.
• GPS Antenna
• SXM Antenna
Perform CONSULT diagnosis if the AV control unit on board diagnosis does not start or the screen does not O
display anything.
P
METHOD OF STARTING

2. While pressing the APPS button, turn the TUNE-SCROLL dial
counterclockwise 3 or more clicks, then clockwise 3 or more
clicks, then counterclockwise 3 or more clicks. Shifting from cur-
rent screen to previous screen is performed by pressing BACK
button.
ALNIA1591ZZ
3. The trouble diagnosis initial screen is displayed, and Version,

User Config, Radio, System State or Self Test can be selected.
ALNIA1378ZZ
CONSULT FUNCTIONS
CONSULT performs the following functions via communication with the AV control unit:

Ecu Identification The AV control unit part number is displayed.
Self Diagnostic Result The AV control unit self diagnostic results are displayed.
Data Monitor The AV control unit input/output data is displayed in real time.
• The vehicle specification can be read and saved.
Configuration
• The vehicle specification can be written when replacing AV control unit.
• The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of AV communication is displayed.
CAN Diag Support Mntr
• The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication is displayed.
ECU IDENTIFICATION
The part number of AV control unit is displayed.
DATA MONITOR
Monitor Item [Unit] Description

Indicates vehicle speed signal received from combination meter on CAN communication
VHCL SPD SIG [On/Off]
line.
ILLUM SIG [On/Off] Indicates condition of illumination signal for the AV control unit.
IGN SIG [On/Off] Indicates condition of ignition signal.
REV SIG [On/Off] Indicates condition of reverse signal received from BCM.
CONFIGURATION
Refer to AV-290, "CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Description".

AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [NAVIGATION WITH BOSE]

AV CONTROL UNIT
B

C
Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH). Off
VHCL SPD SIG
Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH). On D
Illumination signal is not received. Off
ILLUM SIG
Illumination signal is received. On
E
Ignition switch OFF. Off
IGN SIG
Ignition switch ON. On
Selector lever in any position other than R. Off F
REV SIG
Selector lever in R position. On
TERMINAL LAYOUT
G
AWNIA4167ZZ
J
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal K
Output switch
L
1
Ground BOSE amp. ON signal Output ON — Battery voltage
(BR)

(R) (G) LH AV
SKIB3609E
O
P
(V) (LG) LH
SKIB3609E
7
(W)

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Output switch
8 Input/
— CAN high — — —
(L) Output
9
Ground Illumination control signal Input ON Headlamps ON Battery voltage
(V)
10 Pre-amp sound signal
— — — — —
(B) shield

(R) (W) RH
SKIB3609E

(L) (Y) RH
SKIB3609E
17 Input/
— CAN low — — —
(R) Output

JSNIA0012GB
19
(L)
20
(B)

(G) (AUX input)
SKIB3609E
22
(Y)

(L) (AUX input)
SKIB3609E

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Output switch
24 B
— HE/VR mode change — — — —
(R)
Battery voltage
25 verse) C
0V
30 D
— MR output Output — — —
(BG)
31 Input/
(SB) Output E
32 Input/
(LG) Output
F

Microphone signal Input ON G
(W) (Shield) phone.
SKIB3609E H
35 MIC VCC (without telemat-
— Input ON — —
(B) ics system)
37 I
(Shield)
38 Input/
(SB) Output J
39 Input/
(LG) Output
40
K
(LG)
41 When camera image is dis-

Ground Camera image signal Input ON
(G) played
M
SKIB2251J
42 Camera image signal AV

— — — — —
(Shield) shield
45
(R) O
46
(W)
47
P
(G)
49
(B)
50
(Shield)

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Output switch
(B) selected.
Ground AM-FM main antenna Input ON 5.0 V
(B) selected.
53
— Antenna amp. shield — — — —
(Shield)
56 AV control unit ON, SXM
(B) selected.
57
(Shield)
58 AV control unit ON, NAV se-
Ground GPS antenna signal Input ON 5.0 V
(B) lected.
59
— GPS antenna shield — — — —
(Shield)
60 64 While speaking into the mi-

(R) (L) crophone
SKIB3609E
61
— Microphone shield — — — —
(Shield)
68
(B)
70
(G)
71
(W)
72
(R)
73
(Shield)
CONSULT Display Reference Page

U1000: CAN COMM CIRCUIT AV-293, "DTC Description"
U1010: CONTROL UNIT (CAN) AV-294, "DTC Description"
U1217: BLUETOOTH MODULE AV-295, "DTC Description"
U1229: iPod CERTIFICATION AV-296, "DTC Description"
U122F: Digital broadcasting connection error AV-297, "DTC Description"
U1244: GPS ANTENNA CONN AV-298, "DTC Description"
U1258: SXM ANTENNA CONN AV-299, "DTC Description"
U1263: USB OVERCURRENT AV-301, "DTC Description"
U1265: AMP ON TERMINAL AV-302, "DTC Description"
U12AA: Configuration Error AV-304, "DTC Description"

AV CONTROL UNIT
CONSULT Display Reference Page
A
U12AB: FM Antenna error AV-305, "DTC Description"
U12AC: Display Temperature too High AV-306, "DTC Description"
U12AD: ECU Temperature too High AV-307, "DTC Description" B
U12AE: Internal Amplifier temperature Warning AV-308, "DTC Description"
U12AF: CD Mechanism Temperature Warning AV-309, "DTC Description"
U12B0: Supply Voltage Goes below 9V > 20s AV-310, "DTC Description" C
U12B1: Supply Voltage Goes High > 16V for 20s AV-311, "DTC Description"
U1300: AV COMM CIRCUIT AV-312, "DTC Description"
D
U1310: CONTROL UNIT(AV) AV-314, "DTC Description"
AV

BOSE SPEAKER AMP
BOSE SPEAKER AMP
TERMINAL LAYOUT
ALNIA1599ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal
Output switch

(SB) (V) 1
SKIB3609E

(GR) (Y) 2
SKIB3609E
4 5 Front door speaker and

(BR) (P) front tweeter signal LH
SKIA0177E

(LG) (V) LH
SKIA0177E

BOSE SPEAKER AMP
Terminal
(wire color) Reference value A
Output switch
B
8 13 Front door speaker and C

(G) (R) front tweeter signal RH
SKIA0177E D
11
Ground Battery power supply Input – – Battery voltage
(W)
12
E
Ground Ground – ON – 0V
(B)
15 28
Center speaker signal Output ON Sound output
(V) (BG)
G
SKIA0177E
H
18 32 I
Sound signal front LH Input ON Sound output
(R) (G)
J
SKIA0177E
K
19 20
Sound signal front RH Input ON Sound output
(Y) (L)
L
SKIA0177E
21 22
Sound signal rear LH Input ON Sound output AV
(V) (LG)
SKIA0177E
O
P
23 33
Sound signal rear RH Input ON Sound output
(W) (R)
SKIA0177E

BOSE SPEAKER AMP
Terminal
Output switch
31
Ground Amp. ON signal Input ON – Greater than 6.5V
(BR)

(LG) (V) RH
SKIA0177E

NAVIGATION WITH BOSE
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [NAVIGATION WITH BOSE]
WIRING DIAGRAM A
B
AV
AANWA1815GB

AANWA1816GB

AV
AANWA1817GB

AANWA1818GB

AV
AANIA5758GB

AANIA5759GB

AV
AANIA5760GB

AANIA5761GB

AV
AANIA5762GB

AANIA5763GB

AV
AANIA5764GB

AANIA5765GB

AV
AANIA5766GB

AANIA5767GB

< BASIC INSPECTION > [NAVIGATION WITH BOSE]
BASIC INSPECTION A
B
OVERALL SEQUENCE
C
AWNIA2982GB M
DETAILED FLOW
1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM AV
O
>> GO TO 2.
2.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM P
when the symptom is detected.
>> GO TO 3.

2. Perform Self Diagnostic Result for MULTI AV.
YES >> Refer to AV-268, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.PERFORM SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
Refer to AV-338, "Symptom Table".
>> GO TO 5.
5.FINAL CHECK
Refer to symptom described by the customer in step 1.
Is the symptom still present?
YES >> GO TO 2.

A
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AV CONTROL UNIT
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AV CONTROL UNIT : Description
INFOID:0000000015258734 B
BEFORE REPLACEMENT
When replacing AV control unit, save or print current vehicle specification with CONSULT configuration before C
replacement.
NOTE:
If “Before Replace ECU” cannot be used, use the “After Replace ECU” or “Manual Configuration” after replac- D
AFTER REPLACEMENT
CAUTION: E
When replacing AV control unit, you must perform “After Replace ECU” with CONSULT.
• Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model. F
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AV CONTROL UNIT : Work Procedure

INFOID:0000000015258735
G
-CONSULT H
Enter “Re/Programming, Configuration” and perform “Before Replace ECU” to save or print current vehicle
specification.
NOTE:
I
J
>> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE AV CONTROL UNIT
Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-352, "Removal and Installation". K
>> GO TO 3.
L
3.WRITING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION
CONSULT
1. Enter "Re/Programming, Configuration". M
2. If “Before Replace ECU” operation was performed, automatically an "Operation Log Selection" screen will
specification. Refer to AV-290, "CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Work Procedure".
tion" to write vehicle specification. Refer to AV-290, "CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Work Pro-
cedure".
O
>> GO TO 4.
4.REGISTER AV CONTROL UNIT P
Perform AV control unit registration. Refer to AV-291, "REGISTRATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Work Proce-
dure".
>> GO TO 5.
5.OPERATION CHECK
Check that the operation of the AV control unit and camera images (fixed guide lines) are normal.

>> Work End.

CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT)
CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Description INFOID:0000000015258736
Vehicle specification needs to be written with CONSULT because it is not written after replacing AV control
unit.
Configuration has three functions as follows:
• Reads the vehicle configuration of current AV control unit.
"Before Replace ECU"
"After Replace ECU" Writes the vehicle configuration with manual selection.
"Select Saved Data List" Writes the vehicle configuration with saved data.
CAUTION:
• When replacing AV control unit, you must perform “Select Saved Data List” or "After Replace ECU"
with CONSULT.
• Complete the procedure of “Select Saved Data List” or "After Replace ECU" in order.
• If you set incorrect “Select Saved Data List” or "After Replace ECU", incidents might occur.
• Never perform “Select Saved Data List” or "After Replace ECU" except for new AV control unit.
CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Work Procedure INFOID:0000000015258737

CONSULT
Select “Reprogramming, Configuration” of AV control unit.

2.PERFORM “SAVED DATA LIST”
CONSULT
Automatically “Operation Log Selection” window will display if “Before Replace ECU” was performed. Select
applicable file from the “Save Data List” and press “Confirm”.
>> Work End.

3.PERFORM “AFTER REPLACE ECU” OR “MANUAL CONFIGURATION”
CONSULT
1. Select “After Replace ECU” or “Manual Configuration”.
2. Identify the correct model and configuration list. Refer to AV-291, "CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL
UNIT) : Configuration List".
3. Confirm and/or change setting value for each item.
CAUTION:
Thoroughly read and understand the vehicle specification. ECU control may not operate normally
if the setting is not correct.
4. Select “Next”.
CAUTION:
Make sure to select “Next”, confirm each setting value and press “OK” even if the indicated con-
figuration of brand new AV control unit is same as the desirable configuration. If not, configuration
which is set automatically by selecting vehicle model can not be memorized.
5. When "Completed", select "End".
>> GO TO 4.

4.OPERATION CHECK A
Confirm that each function controlled by AV control unit operates normally.
>> Work End. B

CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Configuration List INFOID:0000000015258738
CAUTION: C
Thoroughly read and understand the vehicle specification. Incorrect settings may result in abnormal
control of ECU.
D
MANUAL SETTING ITEM
Items Setting value
SOUND SYSTEM BASE ⇔ BOSE E
CAMERA SYSTEM NONE/AVM ⇔ REAR CAMERA
⇔: Items which confirm vehicle specifications
F
REGISTRATION (AV CONTROL UNIT)
REGISTRATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Description INFOID:0000000015258739
G
AFTER REPLACEMENT
If the AV control unit is replaced with a new AV control unit, the new AV control unit must be registered using
the registration code. H
CAUTION:
If the new AV control unit registration code is not registered, the “APPS” mode will not function.
REGISTRATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Work Procedure INFOID:0000000015258740
I
1.RECORD REGISTRATION CODE FOR REPLACEMENT AV CONTROL UNIT

J
1. Refer to the replacement AV control unit’s label located on the top of the AV control unit.
AV
ALNIA1654ZZ
P
2. Create a registration code to supply to NISSAN Owner Services by combining the last 9 digits of the NIS-
SAN PART NO. (1) and the first 7 digits of the bar code number (2).

AWNIA3614ZZ
3. Record the registration code.
>> GO TO 2.
2.REGISTER REPLACEMENT AV CONTROL UNIT
Register the replacement AV control unit by contacting NISSAN Owner Services. Refer to TSB.
>> GO TO 3.
3.OPERATION CHECK
Verify that the AV control unit “APPS” function operates normally.
>> Work End.

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [NAVIGATION WITH BOSE]
B
DESCRIPTION
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real-time application. It is an on-vehicle mul- C
communication lines (CAN-H, CAN-L) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each D
tion Signal Chart". E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
CONSULT screen terms F

Signal (terminal) — G
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
U1000
H
POSSIBLE CAUSE
I
FAIL-SAFE
—
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE J
CONSULT K
3. Check DTC.
L
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: Inspection End. M
AV

O
CONSULT
2. Erase DTC.
3. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “MULTI AV”. P
4. Check DTC.

DESCRIPTION
tion Signal Chart".
DTC DETECTION LOGIC


U1010
[Control unit(CAN)] Threshold —
POSSIBLE CAUSE
FAIL-SAFE
—
CONSULT
3. Check DTC.

CONSULT
2. Erase DTC.
4. Check DTC.

A

BLUETOOTH MODULE
U1217 Communication error to Bluetooth sub mod- D
(Bluetooth module) Threshold
ule
E
POSSIBLE CAUSE
AV control unit
FAIL-SAFE F
—
G
CONSULT
3. Check DTC.

CONSULT L
2. Erase DTC.
4. Check DTC.

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

iPod CERTIFICATION
U1229 Communication error to iPod authentication
(iPod certification) Threshold
chip
POSSIBLE CAUSE
AV control unit
FAIL-SAFE
—
CONSULT
3. Check DTC.

CONSULT
2. Erase DTC.
4. Check DTC.

A

Digital broadcasting connection er-
ror Signal (terminal) —
U122F
(Digital broadcasting connection Threshold — D
error)
POSSIBLE CAUSE E
AV control unit
FAIL-SAFE
— F

CONSULT
2. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “MULTI AV”. H
3. Check DTC.
Is DTC U122F detected?
YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-352, "Removal and Installation". I
J
AV

U1244 GPS ANTENNA
U1244 GPS ANTENNA
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

GPS ANTENNA CONN Signal (terminal) —

U1244
(GPS antenna conn) Threshold GPS antenna disconnected or short circuit
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• GPS antenna disconnected
• GPS antenna signal circuit open or short to ground
• GPS antenna
• AV control unit
FAIL-SAFE
—
CONSULT
3. Check DTC.
1.GPS ANTENNA INSPECTION

Visually inspect the GPS antenna and antenna feeder. Refer to AV-364, "Removal and Installation".
YES >> GO TO 2.

Ground
M141 58 — 5.0 V
YES >> Replace GPS antenna. Refer to AV-364, "Removal and Installation".

A

XM ANTENNA CONN
U1258 Satellite antenna disconnected or short cir- D
(XM antenna conn) Threshold
cuit
E
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Satellite antenna disconnected
• Satellite antenna signal circuit open or short to ground F
• Satellite antenna
• AV control unit
FAIL-SAFE G
—
H
CONSULT
3. Check DTC.
K
L
M
1.SATELLITE ANTENNA INSPECTION
Visually inspect the satellite antenna and antenna feeder. Refer to AV-256, "Antenna and Antenna Feeder".
Is inspection result normal? AV
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SATELLITE ANTENNA FEEDER CONTINUITY O

2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M142 and satellite radio antenna connector M503.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M142 and satellite radio antenna connector M503. P
AV control unit Satellite radio antenna

Continuity
M142 56 M503 4 Yes

AV control unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
M142 56 — No
YES >> GO TO 3.
1. Connect AV control unit connector M142 and satellite radio antenna connector M503.

Ground
M142 56 — 5.0 V
YES >> Replace satellite radio antenna AV-365, "Removal and Installation".

U1263 USB
U1263 USB
A

USB OVERCURRENT
U1263 USB power supply excess maximum cur- D
(USB overcurrent) Threshold
rent
E
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Device connected to USB interface
• USB interface harness F
• AV control unit
FAIL-SAFE
— G
CONSULT
1. If there is a device connected to the USB interface, disconnect it.
4. Check DTC.
K
1.CHECK USB INTERFACE HARNESS L

Visually inspect USB interface harness. Refer to AV-362, "Removal and Installation".
YES >> GO TO 2. M
2.CHECK USB INTERFACE HARNESS AV
Check USB interface harness circuits. Refer to AV-336, "Diagnosis Procedure".
YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-352, "Removal and Installation". O

U1265 AUDIO AMP.
U1265 AUDIO AMP.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

AMP ON TERMINAL
U1265 Current of external control line exceeded
(amp ON terminal) Threshold
maximum
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Amp ON signal circuit open or short to ground
• AV control unit
FAIL-SAFE
—
CONSULT
3. Check DTC.
1.CHECK CONTINUITY BETWEEN AV CONTROL UNIT AND BOSE SPEAKER AMP.

2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M108 and Bose speaker amp. connector B138.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M108 and Bose speaker amp. connector B138.
AV control unit Bose speaker amp.

Continuity
M108 1 B138 31 Yes
AV control unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
M108 1 — No
YES >> GO TO 2.

U1265 AUDIO AMP.
2.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE A
1. Connect AV control unit connector M108.

B
3. Check voltage between AV control unit connector M108 and ground.
AV control unit
Voltage C
(+) Ground
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M108 1 — Battery voltage D
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-352, "Removal and Installation". E
AV

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Configuration Error Signal (terminal) —

U12AA
(Configuration Error) Threshold Incomplete Configuration
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• AV control unit configuration
• AV control unit
FAIL-SAFE
—
CONSULT
3. Check DTC.
CONSULT
1. Perform configuration procedure. Refer to AV-290, "CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Work Pro-
cedure".
4. Check DTC.

U12AB ANTENNA
U12AB ANTENNA
A

FM Antenna error Signal (terminal) —

U12AB
(FM Antenna error) Threshold Rod antenna disconnected or short circuit D
POSSIBLE CAUSE E
• Rod antenna disconnected
• AM/FM antenna signal open or short to ground
• Rod antenna F
• AV control unit
FAIL-SAFE
— G
CONSULT
2. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “MULTI AV”. I
3. Check DTC.
Is DTC U12AB detected?
1.ANTENNA INSPECTION M
Visually inspect the antenna and antenna feeder. Refer to AV-256, "Antenna and Antenna Feeder".
AV
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE O
P
Ground
M139 52 — 5.0 V
YES >> Replace antenna base. Refer to AV-365, "Removal and Installation".

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Display Temperature too High
U12AC Upper operation temperature of display ex-
(Display Temperature too High) Threshold
ceeded
POSSIBLE CAUSE
AV control unit
FAIL-SAFE
—
CONSULT
3. Check DTC.

CONSULT
2. Erase DTC.
4. Check DTC.

A

ECU Temperature too High
U12AD Upper operation temperature of AV control D
(ECU Temperature too High) Threshold
unit exceeded
E
POSSIBLE CAUSE
AV control unit
FAIL-SAFE F
—
G
CONSULT
3. Check DTC.
Is DTC U12AD detected? I

CONSULT L
2. Erase DTC.
4. Check DTC.
Is DTC U12AD detected?

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Internal Amplifier temperature
Warning Signal (terminal) —
U12AE
(Internal Amplifier temperature Threshold Amplifier temperature threshold exceeded
Warning)
POSSIBLE CAUSE
AV control unit
FAIL-SAFE
—
CONSULT
3. Check DTC.

CONSULT
2. Erase DTC.
4. Check DTC.

A

CD Mechanism Temperature Signal (terminal) —
Warning
U12AF Upper operation temperature of CD drive D
(CD Mechanism Temperature Threshold
Warning) exceeded
E
POSSIBLE CAUSE
AV control unit
FAIL-SAFE F
—
G
CONSULT
3. Check DTC.
Is DTC U12AF detected? I

CONSULT L
2. Erase DTC.
4. Check DTC.
Is DTC U12AF detected?

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Supply Voltage Goes below 9V > Signal (terminal) —
20s
U12B0 Lower operation threshold of supply voltage
(Supply Voltage Goes below 9V > Threshold
20s) exceeded
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• AV control unit power supply or ground circuits
• AV control unit
FAIL-SAFE
—
CONSULT
3. Check DTC.
1.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUITS


A

Supply Voltage Goes High > 16V Signal (terminal) —
for 20s
U12B1 Upper operation threshold of supply voltage D
(Supply Voltage Goes High > 16V Threshold
for 20s) exceeded
E
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• AV control unit F
FAIL-SAFE
—

CONSULT H
3. Check DTC. I
1.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUITS L

AV

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC No. (Trouble diagnosis content) DTC detection condition

AV comm circuits are shorted to ground
Signal (terminal)
1 (terminals 31, 32, 38, and 39)
Threshold AV comm circuits are shorted to ground
AV COMM CIRCUIT Diagnosis delay time 2 seconds or more

U1300
(AV comm circuit error) Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.
AV comm circuits are open (terminals 31,
Signal (terminal)
2 32, 38, and 39)
Threshold AV comm circuits are open
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Harness or connector (AV comm circuits are open or short)
FAIL SAFE
—
CONSULT
5. Check DTC.
1.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT FOR METER M&A

2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” for “METER M&A”.
YES >> Refer to MWI-32, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK AV COMMUNICATION LOW CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M109 and combination meter connector M77.

AV control unit Combination meter A

Continuity
31
M109 M77 47 Yes B
38
C
AV control unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
D
31
M109 — No
38
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK AV COMMUNICATION HIGH CIRCUIT CONTINUITY F
G
Continuity
32 H
M109 M77 48 Yes
39
I
AV control unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
J
32
M109 — No
39
Is the inspection result normal? K
L
AV

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONTROL UNIT (AV) Signal (terminal) –

U1310
(AV control unit initialization error) Threshold –
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• AV control unit
FAIL SAFE
—
CONSULT
5. Check DTC.
YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-352, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-54, "Intermittent Incident".

A
AV CONTROL UNIT
AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000015258790
B

C
1.CHECK FUSE
Check that the following fuses are not blown: D

E

Are the fuses blown? F
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT G
2. Disconnect AV control unit connectors M108 and M109.
3. Check voltage between AV control unit connectors M108 and M109 and ground. H

Ground Condition
Connector Terminal (Approx.) I
M108 19 Ignition switch: OFF
— Battery voltage
M109 40 Ignition switch: ON
J
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. K
2. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M108 and ground. L
AV control unit
Ground Continuity
M108 20 — Yes
AV
BOSE SPEAKER AMP O
BOSE SPEAKER AMP : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000015258791
P
1.CHECK FUSE


NO >> GO TO 2.
2. Disconnect Bose speaker amp. connector B137.
3. Check voltage between Bose speaker amp. connector B137 and ground.
Bose speaker amp. Voltage

Ground Condition
B137 11 — Ignition switch: OFF Battery voltage

YES >> GO TO 3.
Check continuity between Bose speaker amp. connector B137 and ground.
Bose speaker amp.

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
B137 12 — Yes

FRONT TWEETER
FRONT TWEETER
A
B
C
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
Check the AV control unit, Bose speaker amp. and speaker connectors for the following:
• Damage
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FRONT TWEETER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY (BOSE SPEAKER AMP.) F
1. Disconnect Bose speaker amp. connectors and suspect front tweeter connector.
2. Check continuity between Bose speaker amp. connectors and suspect front tweeter connector.
G
Bose speaker amp. Front tweeter
Continuity
H
4 1
M80 (LH)
5 2
B137 Yes
8 1 I
M23 (RH)
13 2
J
Bose speaker amp.

Ground Continuity
4
5
B137 — No L
8
13
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK FRONT TWEETER SIGNAL (BOSE SPEAKER AMP.) AV
1. Connect Bose speaker amp. connectors and suspect front tweeter connector.
3. Push AV control unit POWER switch. O
Bose speaker amp. connector B137 P

Terminal Terminal

FRONT TWEETER
4 5
Audio signal output

8 13
SKIB3609E

YES >> Replace front tweeter. Refer to AV-317, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK FRONT TWEETER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY (AV CONTROL UNIT)
2. Disconnect Bose speaker amp. connector B138 and AV control unit connector M108.
3. Check continuity between Bose speaker amp. connector B138 and AV control unit connector M108.
Bose speaker amp. AV control unit

Continuity
18 2
32 3
B138 M108 Yes
19 11
20 12
Bose speaker amp.

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
18
32
B138 — No
19
20
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK FRONT TWEETER SIGNAL (AV CONTROL UNIT)
1. Connect Bose speaker amp. connector B138 and AV control unit connector M108.
4. Check signal between AV control unit connector M108 and ground.

Terminal Terminal
2 3
Audio signal output

11 12
SKIB3609E

FRONT TWEETER
YES >> Replace Bose speaker amp. Refer to AV-315, "BOSE SPEAKER AMP : Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-315, "AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure". A
AV

CENTER SPEAKER
CENTER SPEAKER
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
• Damage
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK CENTER SPEAKER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY (BOSE SPEAKER AMP.)
1. Disconnect Bose speaker amp. connector B138 and center speaker connector M70.
2. Check continuity between Bose speaker amp. connector B138 and center speaker connector M70.
Bose speaker amp. Center speaker

Continuity
15 1
B138 M70 Yes
28 2
Bose speaker amp.

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
15
B138 — No
28
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK CENTER SPEAKER SIGNAL (BOSE SPEAKER AMP.)
1. Connect Bose speaker amp. connector B138 and center speaker connector M70.
4. Check signal between Bose speaker amp. connector B138 and ground.

Terminal Terminal
15 28 Audio signal output
SKIB3609E

CENTER SPEAKER
YES >> Replace center speaker. Refer to AV-320, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> GO TO 4. A
4.CHECK CENTER SPEAKER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY (AV CONTROL UNIT)
B

C
Continuity
18 2 D
32 3
B138 M108 Yes
19 11
20 12 E
F
Bose speaker amp.
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
18 G
32
B138 — No
19
H
20
YES >> GO TO 5. I
5.CHECK CENTER SPEAKER SIGNAL (AV CONTROL UNIT)
1. Connect Bose speaker amp. connector B138 and AV control unit connector M108. J
4. Check signal between AV control unit connector M108 and ground. K

(+) (−) Condition Reference value L
Terminal Terminal
2 3
M
Audio signal output

11 12 AV
SKIB3609E
O
YES >> Replace Bose speaker amp. Refer to AV-315, "BOSE SPEAKER AMP : Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-315, "AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure". P

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
• Damage
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FRONT DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY (BOSE SPEAKER AMP.)
1. Disconnect Bose speaker amp. connectors and suspect front door speaker connector.
2. Check continuity between Bose speaker amp. connectors and suspect front door speaker connector.
Bose speaker amp. Front door speaker

Continuity
4 1
D9 (LH)
5 2
B137 Yes
8 1
D114 (RH)
13 2
Bose speaker amp.

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
4
5
B137 — No
8
13
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK FRONT DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL (BOSE SPEAKER AMP.)
1. Connect Bose speaker amp. connectors and suspect front door speaker connector.

Terminal Terminal

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
4 5
A
Audio signal output

8 13 B
SKIB3609E
C
NO >> GO TO 4.
D
4.CHECK FRONT DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY (AV CONTROL UNIT)
2. Disconnect Bose speaker amp. connector B138 and AV control unit connector M108. E
Bose speaker amp. AV control unit F

Continuity
18 2
G
32 3
B138 M108 Yes
19 11
20 12 H
Bose speaker amp. I

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
18
J
32
B138 — No
19
20 K
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK FRONT DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL (AV CONTROL UNIT)

1. Connect Bose speaker amp. connector B138 and AV control unit connector M108. M
AV

Terminal Terminal
2 3
P
Audio signal output

11 12
SKIB3609E

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
A
B
C
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
• Damage
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK REAR DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY (BOSE SPEAKER AMP.) F
1. Disconnect Bose speaker amp. connectors and suspect rear door speaker connector.
2. Check continuity between Bose speaker amp. connectors and suspect rear door speaker connector.
G
Bose speaker amp. Rear door speaker
Continuity
H
6 1
B137 D203 (LH)
7 2
Yes
37 1 I
B138 D303 (RH)
27 2
J
Bose speaker amp.

Ground Continuity
6
B137
7
— No L
37
B138
27
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK REAR DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL (BOSE SPEAKER AMP.) AV
1. Connect Bose speaker amp. connectors and suspect rear door speaker connector.
3. Push AV control unit POWER switch. O
Bose speaker amp. P

Connector
Terminal Terminal

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
B137 6 7
Audio signal output

B138 37 27
SKIB3609E

NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK REAR DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY (AV CONTROL UNIT)

Continuity
21 4
22 5
B138 M108 Yes
23 13
33 14
Bose speaker amp.

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
21
22
B138 — No
23
33
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK REAR DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL (AV CONTROL UNIT)
1. Connect Bose speaker amp. connector B138 and AV control unit connector M108.

Terminal Terminal
4 5
Audio signal output

13 14
SKIB3609E

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-352, "Removal and Installation". A
AV

SUBWOOFER
SUBWOOFER
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
Check the AV control unit, BOSE speaker amp. and subwoofer connectors for the following:
• Damage
• Disconnected or looses terminals
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair the terminal and connector.
2.CHECK SUBWOOFER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY (BOSE AMP.)
1. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector B137 and subwoofer connector.
2. Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. connector B137 and subwoofer connector.
BOSE speaker amp. Subwoofer

Continuity
1 2
10 1
B137 B116 Yes
2 4
3 3
3. Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. connector B137 and ground.
BOSE speaker amp.

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
1
10
B137 — No
2
3
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK SUBWOOFER SIGNAL (BOSE AMP.)
1. Connect BOSE speaker amp. connector B137 and subwoofer connector.
4. Check the signal between the terminals of BOSE speaker amp. connector B137.
BOSE speaker amp. connector B137

Terminal Terminal

SUBWOOFER
1 10
A
Audio signal output

2 3 B
SKIB3609E
C
YES >> Replace subwoofer. Refer to AV-361, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 4.
D
4.CHECK SUBWOOFER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY (AV CONTROL UNIT)
1. Disconnect AV control unit connector M108 and BOSE speaker amp. connector B138.
2. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M108 and BOSE speaker amp. connector B138. E
AV control unit BOSE speaker amp.

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal F
4 21
5 22
M108 B138 Yes G
13 23
14 33
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M108 and ground. H
AV control unit
Ground Continuity I
Connector Terminal
4
5 J
M108 — No
13
14
K
YES >> GO TO 5.
L
5.CHECK SUBWOOFER SIGNAL (AV CONTROL UNIT)
1. Connect AV control unit connector M108 and BOSE speaker amp. connector B138.
2. Turn ignition switch to ON. M
AV
Terminal Terminal O
4 5
P
Audio signal output
13 14
SKIB3609E

YES >> Replace BOSE speaker amp. Refer to AV-356, "Removal and Installation".
SUBWOOFER

A
B
C
1.CHECK CONTINUITY BETWEEN AV CONTROL UNIT AND BOSE SPEAKER AMP.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M108 and Bose speaker amp. connector B138. D
3. Check continuity between audio unit connector M108 and Bose speaker amp. connector B138
AV control unit Bose speaker amp. E

Continuity
M108 1 B138 31 Yes
F
AV control unit
Ground Continuity G
Connector Terminal
M108 1 — No
Is the inspection result normal? H
YES >> GO TO 2.
I
1. Connect AV control unit connector M108.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. J
3. Check voltage between AV control unit connector M108 and ground.
AV control unit Ground K

Voltage
(+)
(–) (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M108 1 — Battery voltage L

M
AV

1.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN AV CONTROL UNIT AND MICROPHONE

2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M109 and microphone connector R8.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M109 and microphone connector R8.
AV control unit Microphone

Continuity
24 3
34 1
M109 R8 Yes
35 4
36 2
AV control unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
24
M109 34 — No
35
YES >> GO TO 2.
1. Connect AV control unit connector M109 and microphone connector R8.
Microphone Ground
Voltage
(+)
(-) (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
R8 4 — 5V
YES >> GO TO 3.
Check signal between terminals of AV control unit connector M109.

AV control unit connector M109 A

Terminal Terminal
B
C
D
PKIB5037J

YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-352, "Removal and Installation". E
AV

STEERING SWITCH
STEERING SWITCH


Condition
Depress switch. 52
Depress switch. 134

25
Depress DISPLAY BACK switch. 654
19 1
Depress switch.
Depress switch. 52
Depress switch. 134

18
Depress switch. 264

YES >> GO TO 2.

Continuity
22 8
M76 23 M30 15 Yes
21 14

STEERING SWITCH
Combination meter A
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
22
B
M76 23 — No
21
Is the inspection result normal? C
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH D

E
Combination switch
Continuity
25 8 F
M90 18 M30 15 Yes
19 14
G
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace spiral cable. Refer to SR-16, "Removal and Installation". H
4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN COMBINATION METER AND AV CONTROL UNIT
1. Disconnect combination meter connector M77 and AV control unit connector M109.
2. Check continuity between combination meter connector M77 and AV control unit connector M109. I
Combination meter AV control unit

Continuity J
47 31
M77 M109 Yes
48 32 K
Combination meter L
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
47
M77 — No M
48
YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-352, "Removal and Installation". AV

USB CONNECTOR
USB CONNECTOR
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to .AV-273, "Wiring Diagram"

2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M138 and USB interface connector M89.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M138 and USB interface connector M89.
AV control unit USB interface

Continuity
45 1
46 2
M138 47 M89 3 Yes
49 5
50 6
AV control unit
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
45
M138 Ground No
47

A
B
C
1.CHECK AUX IN JACK HARNESS CONTINUITY
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M109 and AUX in jack connector M104. D
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M109 and AUX in jack connector M104.
AV control unit AUX in jack E

Continuity
21 2
F
M109 22 M104 3 Yes
23 1
4. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M109 and ground. G
AV control unit
— Continuity
21
M109 Ground No
23
I
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. J
AV

MULTI AV SYSTEM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [NAVIGATION WITH BOSE]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
MULTI AV SYSTEM
RELATED TO AUDIO

The disk cannot be removed. AV control unit Refer to AV-263, "On Board Diagnosis
Function".

MULTI AV SYSTEM
A
• Bose amp. ON signal circuit malfunction.
Refer to AV-331, "Diagnosis Procedure". B
• Bose speaker amp. power supply and
ground circuits malfunction.
Refer to AV-315, "BOSE SPEAKER AMP
: Diagnosis Procedure". C
AV control unit and Bose speaker amp. D
Refer to:
tweeter).
- AV-320, "Diagnosis Procedure" (center E
speaker).
door speaker).
- AV-325, "Diagnosis Procedure" (rear F
door speaker).
woofer).
• Sound signal circuit malfunction between G
Refer to:
H
sound is low. tweeter).
Only a certain speaker (front tweeter LH, speaker).
front tweeter RH, center speaker, front door - AV-322, "Diagnosis Procedure" (front I
speaker LH, front door speaker RH, rear door speaker).
door speaker LH, rear door speaker RH, - AV-325, "Diagnosis Procedure" (rear
subwoofer) does not output sound. door speaker).
- AV-328, "Diagnosis Procedure" (sub- J
woofer).
Refer to:
- AV-357, "Removal and Installation" (front K
tweeter).
ter speaker).
- AV-358, "Removal and Installation" (front L
door speaker).
door speaker).
M
woofer).
Refer to AV-263, "On Board Diagnosis AV
Function".
356, "Removal and Installation". O

MULTI AV SYSTEM
Function".
Noise comes out from all speakers.
AV control unit and Bose speaker amp.
Refer to:
tweeter).
speaker).
door speaker).
door speaker).
woofer).
Refer to:
tweeter).
Noise is mixed with audio. er (front tweeter LH, front tweeter RH, cen- - AV-322, "Diagnosis Procedure" (front
ter speaker, front door speaker LH, front door speaker).
door speaker RH, rear door speaker LH, - AV-325, "Diagnosis Procedure" (rear
rear door speaker RH, subwoofer). door speaker).
woofer).
Refer to:
tweeter).
ter speaker).
door speaker).
door speaker).
woofer).
Function".
antenna feeder.
roads)
Feeder".
• Antenna amp. ON signal circuit malfunc-
tion.
Refer to AV-265, "Reference Value".
antenna feeder.
Feeder".

MULTI AV SYSTEM
A
• Malfunction in antenna, antenna feeder
or AV control unit. Perform DTC diagno-
sis.
There is malfunction in the CONSULT self Refer to AV-305, "Diagnosis Procedure". B
diagnosis result. • Poor continuity in antenna feeder.
Refer to AV-264, "CONSULT Function". • Poor connector connection of antenna or
antenna feeder.
Refer to AV-256, "Antenna and Antenna C
No satellite radio reception. Feeder".
• Poor connector connection of antenna or D
There is no malfunction in the CONSULT antenna feeder.
self diagnosis result. • Loose satellite radio antenna mounting
Refer to AV-264, "CONSULT Function". nut.
Refer to AV-256, "Antenna and Antenna E
Feeder".
Buzz/rattle sound from speaker BLE DIAGNOSIS" in the appropriate interi- F
or trim section.
RELATED TO HANDS-FREE PHONE G

the vehicle.
a compatible type. This can be confirmed by changing the cellular phone to another compatible type, and H
Check Compatibility I

2. Verify the customer’s concern. J
NOTE:
3. Write down the customer’s phone brand, model and service provider. K
NOTE:
4. Go to “www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth/”. L
M
any further action.
AV
Perform diagnosis as per the following table: O

MULTI AV SYSTEM

play at the guide).
established. Malfunction in AV control unit.
Hands-free phone cannot be established. • Hands-free phone operation can be per- Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-352,
formed, however, voice between each "Removal and Installation".
sation.
• Steering switch’s , , and Replace steering switch. Refer to AV-354,
switch works, but does not work.
Steering switch’s , , , and Steering switch signal circuit malfunction.
switches do not work.

• Malfunction in SD card.
Navigation malfunction.
Function".
Navigation system is inoperative. Steering switches malfunction.
Microphone signal circuit malfunction.
Voice activated control malfunction.

A
RELATED TO NOISE B
etc.).
The following noise results from variations in field strength, such as fading noise and multi-path noise, or C
external noise from trains and other sources. It is not a malfunction:
• Multi-path noise: This noise results from the waves sent directly from the broadcast station arriving at the D
Check if noise is caused and/or changed by engine speed, ignition switch turned to each position, and opera- E
NOTE:
components, one by one. F

G
H
A cracking or snapping sound occurs with the op- • Relay malfunction, AV control unit malfunc-
Noise only occurs when various eration of various switches. tion
electrical components are oper- I
ing. • Motor
• Rear defogger coil malfunction J
A cracking or snapping sound occurs while the vehicle is being driven, especially when K

L
Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones may not be recognized M

AV
lowing conditions:
O
NOTE: P

call.
Do not place the cellular phone in an area surrounded by metal or
Basic Operation

No image is shown. Display brightness adjustment is set fully to DARK Adjust the display brightness.
side.
No guide sound is heard. Volume control is set to OFF, MIN or MAX. Adjust the audio guide volume.
Audio guide volume is too low or
Audio guidance is not available while the vehicle is System is not malfunctioning.
too high.
driving on a dark pink route.
Screen is too dark. Temperature inside the vehicle is low. Wait until the temperature inside the vehicle
Motion of the image is too slow. reaches the proper temperature.
Small black or bright spots appear Symptom peculiar to a liquid crystal display (dis- System is not malfunction.
on the screen. play unit).
Vehicle Mark

Map screen and BIRDVIEW™ Some thinning of the character data is done to pre- System is not malfunctioning.
Name of the place vary with the vent the display becoming to complex. In some
screen. cases and in some locations, the display contents
may differ.
The same place name, street name, etc. may not
be displayed every time on account of the data
processing.
Vehicle mark is not positioned cor- Vehicle is transferred by ferry or by towing after its Drive the vehicle for a while in the GPS sat-
rectly. ignition switch is turned to OFF. ellite signal receiving condition.
Screen will not switch to nighttime The daytime screen is selected by the “SWITCH Perform screen dimming and select the
mode after the lighting switch is SCREENS” when the last time the screen dim- nighttime screen by “SWITCH SCREENS”.
turned ON. ming setting is done.
Switching between daytime/nighttime screen may
be inhibited by the automatic illumination adjust-
ment function.
Map screen will not scroll in accor- Current location is not displayed. Press “MAP” button to display the current lo-
dance with the vehicle travel. cation.
Vehicle mark will not be shown. Current location is not displayed. Press “MAP” button to display the current lo-
cation.
Accuracy indicator (GPS satellite GPS satellite signal is intercepted because the ve- Move the vehicle out to an open space.
mark) on the map screen stays hicle is in or behind a building.
gray.
GPS satellite signal cannot be received because Do not place anything on top of the meter dis-
an obstacle is placed on top of the instrument pan- play (instrument panel).
el.
GPS satellites are not visible from current location. Wait until GPS satellites are visible by mov-
ing the vehicle.

A
Vehicle location accuracy is low. Accuracy indicator (GPS satellite mark) on the Current location is not determined.
map screen stays gray.
Vehicle speed setting by the vehicle speed pulse Drive the vehicle for a while [for approx. 30
has been deviated (advanced or retarded) from minutes at approx. 30 km/h (19 MPH)] and B
the actual vehicle speed because tire chain is fit- the deviation will be automatically adjusted. If
ted or the system has been used on another vehi- advancement or retard still occur, perform
cle. the distance adjustment by CONFIRMA-
TION/ADJUSTMENT mode of diagnosis
C
function.
Map data has error or omission. (Vehicle mark is As a rule, an updated map DVD–ROM will be
always deviated to the same position.) released once a year. D
Destination, Passing Points and Menu Items Cannot be Selected/Set
E
Destination cannot be set. Destination to be set is on an expressway. Set the destination on an ordinary road.
Passing point is not searched The vehicle has already passed the passing point, To include the passing points that have been F
when re-searching the route. or the system judged so. passed into the route again, set the route
again.
Route information will not be dis- Route searching has not been done. Set the destination and perform route
played. searching. G
Vehicle mark is not on the recommended route. Drive on the recommended route.
H
Route information is not available on the dark pink System is not malfunctioning.
route.
After the route searching, no guide Vehicle mark is not on the recommended route. Drive on the recommended route. I
sign will appear as the vehicle (On the display, only guide signs related to the rec-
goes near the entrance/exit to the ommended route will be shown.)
toll road.
Automatic route searching is not Vehicle is driving on a highway (gray route), or no Drive on a road to be searched. Or re–search J
possible. recommended route is available. the route manually. In this case, however, the
whole route will be searched.
Performed automatic detour Performed search with every conditions consid- System is not malfunctioning. K
search (or detour search). Howev- ered. However, the result is the same as that of the
er, the result is the same as that of previous search.
the previous search.
L
Passing points cannot be set. More than five passing points were set. Passing points can be set up to five. To stop
at more than five points, perform sharing in
several steps.
When setting the route, the starting The current vehicle location is always set as the System is not malfunctioning.
M
point cannot be selected. starting point of a route.
Some menu items cannot be se- The vehicle is being driven. Stop the vehicle at a safe place and then op-
lected. erate the system. AV
Voice Guide


Voice guide will not operate. Note: Voice guide is only available at intersections System is not malfunctioning.
that satisfy certain conditions (indicated by z on
the map). Therefore, guidance may not be given
even when the route on the map changes direction.
The vehicle is not on the recommended route. Return to the recommended route or re-
search the route.
Voice guide is turned OFF. Turn voice guide ON.
Voice guide does not match the ac- Voice guide may vary with the direction to which Drive in conformity to the actual traffic rules.
tual road pattern. the vehicle is turn and the connection of the road to
other roads.
Route Search

No route is shown. No road to be searched is found around the des- Find wider road (orange road or wider) near-
tination. by and reset the destination and passing
points onto it. Take care of the traveling direc-
tion when there are separate up and down
roads.
Starting point and the destination are too close. Set the destination at more distant point.
Conditional traffic regulation (day of the week/ Turn the time-regulating search conditions
time of the day) is set at the area around the cur- OFF. Turn “Avoid regulation time” in the
rent location or the destination. search conditions OFF.
Indicated route is intermittent. In some areas, highways (gray routes) are not System is not malfunctioning.
used for the search(Note)Therefore, the route to
the current location or the passing points may be
intermittent.
When the vehicle has passed the A recommended route is controlled by each sec- System is not malfunctioning.
recommended route, it is deleted tion. When the vehicle has passed the passing
from the screen. point 1, then the map data from the starting point
up to the passing point 1 will be deleted. (The data
may remain undeleted in some area.)
Detouring route is recommended. In some areas, highways (gray routes) are not Set the route closer to the basic route (gray
used for the search. (Note). Therefore, detour route).
route may be recommended.
A detour route may be shown when some traffic Slightly move the starting point or the destina-
regulation (one-way traffic, etc.) is set at the area tion, or set the passing point on the route of
around the starting point or the destination. your choice.
In the area where highways (gray routes) are System is not malfunctioning.
used for the search, left turn has priority around
the current location and the destination (passing
points). For this reason, the recommended route
may be detouring.
Landmarks on the map do not This can be happen due to omission or error in As a rule, an updated map DVD-ROM will be
match the actual ones. the map data. released once a year. Wait until the latest
map has become available.
Recommended route is far from Starting point, passing points, and destination of Reset the destination onto the road nearby. If
the starting point, passing points, the route guide were set far from the desired this road is one of the highways (gray routes),
and destination. points because route searching data around an ordinary road nearby may be displayed as
these area were not stored. the recommended route.
NOTE:
Except for the ordinance-designated cities. (Malfunctioning areas may be changed in the updated map disc.)
Examples of Current-Location Mark Displacement

Vehicle's travel amount is calculated by reading its travel distance and turning angle. Therefore, if the vehicle
is driven in the following manner, an error will occur in the vehicle's current location display. If correct location A
has not been restored after driving the vehicle for a while, perform location correction.
SEL698V
AV

Y–intersections
At a Y intersection or similar gradual divi-

sion of roads, an error in the direction of
travel deduced by the sensor may result in
the current-location mark appearing on the
wrong road.
ELK0192D
Spiral roads
When driving on a large, continuous spiral

road (such as loop bridge), turning angle
error is accumulated and the vehicle mark
may deviate from the correct location.
ELK0193D
Straight roads
When driving on a long, straight road and
slow curve without stopping, map-matching
does not work effectively enough and dis-
tance errors may accumulate. As a result,
rect location when the vehicle is turned at a
If after travelling about 10 km (6
corner.
miles) the correct location has
Road config- ELK0194D
uration Zigzag roads cation correction and, if neces-
When driving on a zigzag road, the map
may be matched to other roads in the simi-
lar direction nearby at every turn, and the
vehicle mark may deviate from the correct
location.
ELK0195D
Roads laid out in a grid pattern

When driving where roads are laid out in a
grid pattern, or where many roads are run-
ning in the similar direction nearby, the map
may be matched to them by mistake and
rect location.
ELK0196D
Parallel roads
When two roads are running in parallel

(such as highway and sideway), the map
may be matched to the other road by mis-
take and the vehicle mark may deviate from
the correct location.
ELK0197D

A
In a parking lot When driving in a parking lot, or other loca-
tion where there are no roads on the map,
matching may place the vehicle mark on a
nearby road. When the vehicle returns to B
the road, the vehicle mark may have devi-
ated from the correct location.
When driving in circle or turning the steer-
ing wheel repeatedly, direction errors accu- C
SEL709V
mulate, and the vehicle mark may deviate
from the correct location.
Turntable D
When the ignition switch is OFF, the navi-
gation system cannot get the signal from
the gyroscope (angular speed sensor).
Place Therefore, the displayed direction may be E
wrong and the correct road may not be eas-
ily returned to after rotating the vehicle on a
turntable with the ignition OFF.
SEL710V
F
Slippery roads On snow, wet roads, gravel, or other roads
where tires may slip easily, accumulated
mileage errors may cause the vehicle mark If after travelling about 10 km (6
to deviate from the correct road. miles) the correct location has G
Slopes When parking in sloped garages, when
cation correction and, if neces-
travelling on banked roads, or in other cas-
sary, direction correction. H
es where the vehicle turns when tilted, an
error in the turning angle will occur, and the
vehicle mark may deviate from the road.
Road not displayed on the map screen I
When driving on new roads or other roads
not displayed on the map screen, map
matching does not function correctly and
matches the location to a nearby road. J
When the vehicle returns to a road which is
on the map, the vehicle mark may deviate
from the correct road.
SEL699V
K
Map data Different road pattern
(Changed due to repair)
If the road pattern stored in the map data
and the actual road pattern are different, L
map matching does not function correctly
and matches the location to a nearby road.
The vehicle mark may deviate from the cor-
rect road. M
ELK0201D
Drive the vehicle for a while. If AV

the distance still deviates, ad-
When tire chains are used, the mileage is
just it by using the distance ad-
Vehicle Use of tire chains not correctly detected, and the vehicle mark
justment function. (If the tire
may deviate from the correct road.
chain is removed, recover the O
original value.)

If the vehicle is driven just after the engine
is started when the gyroscope (angular
Wait for a short while before
Just after the engine is started speed sensor) correction is not completed,
driving after starting the engine.
the vehicle can lose its direction and may
have deviated from the correct location.
Continuous driving without stopping When driving long distances without stop-
Precautions ping, direction errors may accumulate, and
Stop and adjust the orientation.
for driving the current-location mark may deviate from
the correct road.
Abusive driving Spinning the wheels or engaging in other If after travelling about 10 km (6
kinds of abusive driving may result in the miles) the correct location has
system being unable perform correct detec- not been restored, perform lo-
tion, and may cause the vehicle mark to de- cation correction and, if neces-
viate from the correct road. sary, direction correction.
Position correction accuracy
Enter in the road displayed on
If the accuracy of location settings is poor, the screen with an accuracy of
accuracy may be reduced when the correct approx. 1mm.
road cannot be found, particularly in places Caution: Whenever possible,
where there are many roads. use detailed map for the correc-
tion.
How to cor- SEL701V
rect location Direction when location is corrected
If the accuracy of location settings during

correction is poor, accuracy may be re- Perform direction correction.
duced afterwards.
SEL702V
Location Correction by Map-Matching is Slow

• The map-matching function needs to refer to the data of the surrounding area. It is necessary to drive some
distance for the function to work.
• Because map-matching operates on this principle, when there are many roads running in similar directions
in the surrounding area, no matching determination may be made. The location may not be corrected until
some special feature is found.
Name of Road is Not Displayed
The current road name may not be displayed if there are no road names displayed on the map screen.
Contents of Display Differ for Birdview™ and the (Flat) Map Screen
Difference of the BIRDVIEW™ screen from the flat map screen are as follows.
• The current place name displays names which are primarily in the direction of vehicle travel.
• The amount of time before the vehicle travel or turn angle is updated on the screen is longer than for the
(flat) map display.
• The conditions for display of place names, roads, and other data are different for nearby areas and for more
distant areas.
• Some thinning of the character data is done to prevent the display becoming too complex. In some cases
and in some locations, the display contents may differ.
• The same place name, street name, etc. may be displayed multiple times.
Vehicle Mark Shows a Position Which is Completely Wrong
In the following cases, the vehicle mark may appear on completely different position in the map depending on
the GPS satellite signal receiving conditions. In this case, perform location correction and direction correction:
• When location correction has not been done
- If the receiving conditions of the GPS satellite signal is poor, if the vehicle mark becomes out of place, it may
move to a completely different location and not come back if location correction is not done. The position will
be corrected if the GPS signal can be received.
• When the vehicle has traveled by ferry, or when the vehicle has been being towed

- Because calculation of the current location cannot be done when traveling with the ignition off, for example
when traveling by ferry or when being towed, the location before travel is displayed. If the precise location A
can be detected with GPS, the location will be corrected.
Vehicle Mark Jumps
In the following cases, the vehicle mark may appear to jump as a result of automatic correction of the current B
location:
• When map matching has been done
- If the current location and the vehicle mark are different when map matching is done, the vehicle mark may C
seem to jump. At this time, the location may be “corrected” to the wrong road or to a location which is not on
a road.
• When GPS location correction has been done
- If the current location and the vehicle mark are different when the location is corrected using GPS measure- D
ments, the vehicle mark may seem to jump. At this time, the location may be “corrected” to a location which
is not on a road.
Vehicle Mark is in a River or Sea E
The navigation system moves the vehicle mark with no distinction between land and rivers or sea. If the vehi-
cle mark is somehow out of place, it may appear that the vehicle is driving in a river or the sea.
Vehicle Mark Automatically Rotates F
The system wrongly memorizes the rotating status as stopping when the ignition switch is turned ON with the
turntable rotating. That causes the vehicle mark to rotate when the vehicle is stopped.
When Driving on Same Road, Sometimes Vehicle Mark is in Right Place and Sometimes it is in Wrong Place G
The conditions of the GPS antenna (GPS data) and gyroscope (angular speed sensor) change gradually.
Depending on the road traveled and the operation of the steering wheel, the location detection results will be
different. Therefore, even on a road on which the location has never been wrong, conditions may cause the H
vehicle mark to deviate.
AV

AV CONTROL UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [NAVIGATION WITH BOSE]

AV CONTROL UNIT
AWNIA3339ZZ
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• Before replacing AV control unit, perform “READ CONFIGURATION” to save current vehicle specifi-
NOTE:
5. Remove the AV control unit screws, then pull out the AV control unit.
sary).
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:

AV CONTROL UNIT
• When replacing AV control unit, perform "WRITE CONFIGURATION". Refer to AV-291, "REGISTRA-
TION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Description". A
• When replacing AV control unit, the AV control unit must be registered. Refer to AV-290, "CONFIGU-
RATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Description".
B
AV

STEERING SWITCHES
STEERING SWITCHES
ALOIA0584ZZ
1. Steering wheel 2. Steering wheel finisher 3. Steering switches
REMOVAL
NOTE:
: Pawl
ALOIA0575ZZ

STEERING SWITCHES
and remove from the steering wheel. A
: Pawl
B
ALOIA0576ZZ
D
INSTALLATION
E
AV

BOSE SPEAKER AMP
BOSE SPEAKER AMP
REMOVAL
1. Slide the passenger seat to the full forward position.
2. Release the clips using a suitable tool and remove Bose
speaker amp cover (1).
: Metal clip
: Clip
ALNIA1577ZZ
3. Remove Bose speaker amp bolts (A).

4. Disconnect the harness connectors (B) from the Bose speaker
amp (1).
ALNIA1578ZZ
5. Remove the Bose speaker amp and bracket as an assembly.

6. Remove the bolts and the Bose speaker amp from the Bose speaker amp bracket (if necessary).
INSTALLATION

FRONT TWEETER
FRONT TWEETER
A
REMOVAL B
: Pawl
: Front
remove.
ALNIA1663ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
G
AV

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
ALNIA1580ZZ
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

CENTER SPEAKER
CENTER SPEAKER
A
REMOVAL B
1. Release the metal clips (A) using a suitable tool and remove
center speaker grille (1).
2. Remove the center speaker bolts (B). C
3. Pull out the center speaker (2).
E
ALNIA1579ZZ
4. Disconnect the harness connector from the center speaker and remove. F
INSTALLATION
G
AV

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
ALNIA1581ZZ
1. Rear door speaker
REMOVAL
2. Remove rear door speaker bolts, then pull out rear door speaker.
INSTALLATION

SUBWOOFER
SUBWOOFER
A
REMOVAL B
1. Remove the rear luggage floor finisher. Refer to INT-32, "Exploded View".
2. Remove the spare tire clamp (1) by rotating counterclockwise.
C
3. Disconnect the harness connector (A) from the subwoofer (2)
and remove.
: Front
D
ALNIA2059ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
G
AV

REMOVAL
ALNIA1582ZZ
INSTALLATION

MICROPHONE
MICROPHONE
A
REMOVAL B
D
ALNIA1583ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
G
AV

GPS ANTENNA
GPS ANTENNA
REMOVAL
1. Remove instrument panel. Refer to IP-14, "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installa-
tion".
2. Remove screw and the GPS antenna.
INSTALLATION

ANTENNA BASE
ANTENNA BASE
A
AWNIA4563ZZ
G

H
REMOVAL
1. Using a suitable tool and remove the outer cover.
I
J
INSTALLATION K
CAUTION:
M
DISASSEMBLY
AWNIA4564ZZ
ASSEMBLY

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING:
see the SR section.
ness connectors.
WARNING:
Cautions in Removing Battery Terminal, Display Control Unit, and AV Control Unit
INFOID:0000000014844540
CAUTION:
Remove battery terminal, display control unit, and AV control unit after a lapse of 30 seconds or more
after turning the ignition switch OFF.
NOTE:
After the ignition switch is turned OFF, the display control unit, and the AV control unit continues operating for
approximately 30 seconds.

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
PKIA0306E
D
G
PKIA0307E

H
- Oily dirt:
area.

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools INFOID:0000000014844544
(TechMate No.)
Tool name
(J-46534)
Trim Tool Set
AWJIA0483ZZ

PIIB1407E

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
COMPONENT PARTS
B
L
ALNIA2062ZZ

1. Rear view camera Refer to AV-370, "Rear View Camera".
3. Door mirror RH Refer to AV-370, "Side Cameras".
AV
4. Around view monitor control unit Refer to AV-370, "Around View Monitor Control Unit".
5. Front camera Refer to AV-371, "Front Camera".
O
6. Transmission range switch Refer to TM-17, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Transmission Range Switch".
7. IPDM E/R Refer to PCS-6, "Component Parts Location".
8. Combination meter Refer to AV-256, "Combination Meter". P
9. Door mirror LH Refer to AV-370, "Side Cameras".
10. Steering angle sensor Refer to AV-371, "Steering Angle Sensor".

COMPONENT PARTS

and navigation unit are integrated into the AV control unit.
panel functions.
• Around view monitor system views are displayed on the 7-inch dis-
play.
ALNIA1590ZZ
Around View Monitor Control Unit INFOID:0000000015258839
• The around view monitor control unit is installed behind the glove
box.
• Vehicle width guide lines, predicted course line, vehicle front guid-
ing line and vehicle side line, and vehicle icon are displayed and
combined with camera images.
JSNIA5395ZZ
Rear View Camera INFOID:0000000015258840
• The rear view camera is installed in the back door finisher.

• Power is supplied from the around view monitor control unit.
JPNIA1452ZZ
Side Cameras INFOID:0000000015258841
• The side cameras are installed in the door mirrors.

JSNIA5397ZZ

COMPONENT PARTS
Front Camera INFOID:0000000015258842
A
• The front camera is installed in the front grille.
B
D
JSNIA5398ZZ
Steering Angle Sensor INFOID:0000000015258843

E
• Steering sensor is installed to the spiral cable.
• Steering angle sends the steering signal necessary for predictive
course line via CAN communication. F
H
JSNIA1571ZZ
AV

SYSTEM
SYSTEM
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
AWNIA4588GB
DESCRIPTION
• This system is equipped with wide-angle cameras on the front, rear and right and left door mirrors.
• Images from front view, rear view, front-side view (RH side), and birds-eye view are displayed to monitor the
vehicle surroundings.
• Around view monitor control unit expands the image received from each camera to create each view.
• In front view and rear view, the vehicle width, distance lines and predictive course lines are displayed.
• In front-side view, the vehicle distance guiding line and vehicle width guiding line are displayed.
• Birds-eye view converts the images from the cameras into an overhead view and displays the status of the
vehicle on the display. The vehicle icon that is displayed in the birds-eye view is depicted by the around view
monitor control unit.
• Moving Object Detection (MOD) is adopted and detects moving objects according to camera image and noti-
fies the detection result to the driver.
AROUND VIEW MONITOR DISPLAY

SYSTEM
The around view monitor combines and displays travel direction view (front or rear), front-side view and birds-
eye view. A
JSNIA3982GB
OPERATION DESCRIPTION F
• The around view monitor operates by pressing the CAMERA switch on the AV control unit or by shifting to
the R (reverse) position.
• When the shift lever is in any position other than R (reverse) and the CAMERA switch is pressed, the screen G
displays front travel direction view and birds-eye view. Pressing the CAMERA switch again changes birds-
eye view to front-side view
• When the shift lever is placed in R (reverse), the screen displays rear travel direction view and birds-eye
H
view. Pressing the CAMERA switch changes birds-eye view to front-side view
• In birds-eye view, the blind spot area is displayed in black to show the border of the camera images. In addi-
tion, red fixed lines are displayed in the 4 corners of the vehicle icon. After pressing the CAMERA switch for
the first time or placing the shift lever switch in R (reverse) for the first time, the blind spot area is highlighted I
in yellow for 3 seconds and the red fixed lines blink five times.
• With the shift lever in any position other than R (reverse), the around view monitor screen display is can-
celled 3 minutes after pressing the CAMERA switch. The screen returns to the AV control unit display. J
• With the shift lever in R (reverse) position, the around view monitor screen display remains on constantly. To
return to the AV control unit display, place the shift lever in any position other than R (reverse).
• If camera image calibration is incomplete, the applicable camera position is indicated as an error on the
birds-eye view display. K
NOTE:
Calibration is necessary when replacing each camera or when replacing around view monitor control unit.
L
AV

SYSTEM
Around view monitor screen transition
JSNIA4607GB
Front View
• The front view image improves the visibility of obstacles in front of the vehicle and assists driving by display-
ing images from birds-eye view and front-side view.
• The front view image displays the vehicle width guiding line and vehicle distance guiding line, in addition to
the predictive course line according to the steering angle.
• If the steering angle is within approximately 90 degrees, the predictive course lines on the left/right side are
displayed. If the steering angle exceeds approximately 90 degrees, only the predictive course line on the
outside is displayed (opposite side of steering direction).
• The around view monitor control unit receives the steering angle signal from steering angle sensor via CAN
communication, and controls the direction and distance of the predictive course line.
• ON/OFF setting of predictive course line can be performed using CONSULT.

SYSTEM
Front view guiding lines
A
JSNIA0770GB F
Rear View
• The rear view image improves the visibility of obstacles in the rear of the vehicle and assists backing and
parking by displaying images from birds-eye view and rear view. G
• The rear view image displays the vehicle width guiding line and vehicle distance guiding line, in addition to
the predictive course line according to the steering angle.
NOTE: H
The predictive course line is not displayed at the steering neutral position.
• The around view monitor control unit receives the steering angle signal from steering angle sensor via CAN
communication, and controls the direction and distance of the predictive course line.
• ON/OFF setting of predictive course line can be performed using CONSULT. I
Rear view guiding lines
J
AV
JSNIA4567GB
Front-side View
• The front-side view image improves the visibility of obstacles in the front RH side of the vehicle and assists
O
backing and parking.
• The front-side view image displays the vehicle distance guiding line and vehicle width guiding line.

SYSTEM
Front-side view area and guiding line
JSNIA0771GB
Birds-eye View
Birds-Eye View
• The birds-eye view image improves the visibility of obstacles all around the vehicle and assists backing and
parking.
• The images from the four cameras are converted into an overhead view, and the surroundings of the vehicle
are displayed.
• The blind spot area is displayed on the image to specify the boundary of the four cameras.
Birds-Eye view display image
AWNIA3345GB

SYSTEM
Birds-Eye view display area
A
H
AWNIA3142GB
Moving Object Detection (MOD)

• Moving Object Detection (MOD) is a function that notifies the driver of the presence of moving objects in the I
area around the vehicle. MOD detects moving objects from camera image, illuminates frame of view in yel-
low whenever “MOD” icon is displayed in blue.
• Around view monitor control unit superimposes yellow frame line on camera image signal and outputs it to
AV control unit display when moving objects are detected. J
• Around view monitor control unit detects moving objects from camera image according to an image recogni-
tion method called optical flow.
• MOD does not detect a background as a moving object when the vehicle moves (when whole screen K
moves) but detects a moving object when an actual moving object is displayed on screen.
• Color of “MOD” icon indicates whether or not MOD is operative. “MOD” icon is displayed as shown in the fol-
lowing table. when MOD is operative, “MOD” icon is displayed in blue. when MOD is not operative, “MOD”
icon is displayed in gray. L
Shift position
M
View P, N or D position R position
“MOD” icon display
Birds-Eye view Gray AV
Birds-Eye view and rear view —
Rear view Blue
Birds-Eye view Blue
Birds-Eye view and front view — O
Front view Gray
Side view ×
Side view and rear view —
Rear view Blue P
Side view ×
Side view and front view —
Front view Blue
×: Icon is not displayed.
—: View is not displayed in each shift position (D position and R position).
• MOD illuminates frame of view in yellow when any of the conditions in the following table are satisfied:

SYSTEM
Operation Condition
View where MOD is operative
Shift position Vehicle speed
P or N position 0 km/h Birds-Eye view
0 km/h (0 MPH) or more - less than 8 km/h (5
D position Front view
MPH)
0 km/h (0 MPH) or more - less than 8 km/h (5
R position Rear view
MPH)
• MOD does not operate or stops operation when any of the conditions in the following table are satisfied:
Operation stop condition Note

• MOD does not stop operation for front view.
Door open • Operation stops for rear view while back door is open.
• Operation stops for Bird’s-Eye view when any door is open.
CAMERA IMAGE OPERATION PRINCIPLE

• If the information written to around view monitor control unit and the information from the camera do not
match, the applicable camera position is indicated as an error on the Birds-Eye view display. (Calibration
operation is necessary when replacing each camera or when replacing around view monitor control unit.)
• Around view monitor control unit receives the camera switch signal from AV control unit via CAN communi-
cation by pressing the “CAMERA” button.
• Around view monitor control unit that receives the camera button signal supplies the power to each camera
and inputs the camera image from each camera.
• When the shift lever switch is in the reverse position, around view monitor control unit receives the reverse
signal, supplies the power to each camera, and inputs the camera image from each camera.
• Around view monitor control unit that receives the camera image signal from each camera cuts out the
required screen for each view, superimposes the camera image, vehicle icon, guiding lines and “MOD” icon
and outputs them to the AV control unit display.
Fail-Safe INFOID:0000000015258845
DTC
Malfunction detection condition Fail-safe condition
Display contents of CONSULT
U0428: ST ANGLE SENSOR CAL- • Predicted course line is not displayed.
Neutral position adjustment of steering angle
IBRATION • MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
sensor is not complete.
stopped.
The following functions are stopped
• When communication of steering angle sen-
sor signal is not normal:
- Predicted course line is not displayed.
- MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
When around view monitor control unit cannot
stopped.
U1000: CAN COMM CIRCUIT transmit/receive CAN communication signal
• When communication of vehicle signal,
continuously for 2 seconds or more.
wheel speed sensor signal, and shift signal
is not normal:
stopped.

SYSTEM
DTC
Display contents of CONSULT A
No-signal status of rear camera image signal is
U111A: REAR CAMERA IMAGE
continued for 500 ms or more while ignition
SIGNAL
switch is ON. B
No-signal status of side camera RH image signal
U111B: SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE
is continued for 500 ms or more while ignition
SIGNAL
switch is ON. Camera image is not displayed (gray screen C
No-signal status of front camera image signal is display).
U111C: FRONT CAMERA IMAGE
SIGNAL
switch is ON.
D
No-signal status of side camera LH image signal
U111D: SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE
SIGNAL
switch is ON.
Neutral position adjustment of steering angle • Predicted course line is not displayed. E
U1232: ST ANGLE SEN CALIB sensor is performed. NG signal from steering an- • MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
gle sensor is received. stopped.
Camera power supply voltage does not satisfy F
the following conditions for 2 seconds or more
when ignition switch is turned ON:
U1302: CAMERA POWER VOLT • When supplemental lighting power supply out- Camera power output is stopped.
put is ON: 5.9 – 6.5 V. G
• When OFF: 0 V by camera power supply mea-
surement.
• When camera calibration is incomplete. H
• When camera information in around view Unmatched icon display (red) is displayed
U1304: CAMERA IMAGE CALIB
monitor control unit and information read from (applicable for unmatched camera only).
camera are not the same.
I
The vehicle setting of around view monitor con- Operation is according to the vehicle setting
U1305: CONFIG UNFINISH
trol unit is incomplete. value as default value.
When around view monitor control unit is not
Switch to camera screen is not allowed. J
normal.
When communication between around view
monitor control unit and each camera is not nor- On applicable camera screen, marking
Other (Red) is displayed.
mal. K
When communication line between around view
monitor control unit and each camera image line On applicable camera image screen, dis-
is affected by electromagnetic noises. play (Blue) is displayed.
L
AV

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT)
CONSULT FUNCTIONS
CONSULT performs the following functions via communication with the around view monitor control unit.

ECU Identification The around view monitor control unit part number is displayed.
Self Diagnostic Result The around view monitor control unit self diagnostic results are displayed.
Data Monitor The around view monitor control unit input/output data is displayed in real time.
Work support The settings for around view monitor control unit functions can be changed.
• The vehicle specification can be read and saved.
Configuration
• The vehicle specification can be written when replacing around view monitor control unit.
CAN Diag Support Mntr The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication is displayed.
ECU IDENTIFICATION
The part number of around view monitor control unit is displayed.
DATA MONITOR
Monitor Item Description

ST ANGLE SENSOR SIGNAL [On/Off] Indicates condition of steering angle sensor signal.
REVERSE SIGNAL [On/Off] Indicates selector lever position.
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL [mph/km/h] Indicates condition of vehicle speed signal.
CAMERA SWITCH SIGNAL [On/Off] Indicates condition of camera switch signal.
CAMERA OFF SIGNAL [On/Off] Indicates condition of camera OFF signal.
ST ANGLE SENSOR TYPE [Absolute] Indicates steering angle sensor type.
STEERING GEAR RATIO TYPE [Type
Indicates steering gear ratio type.
0]
STEERING POSITION [LHD/RHD] Indicates LH or RH drive type.
REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL [OK/
Indicates condition of camera image signal.
NG]
F-CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL [OK/NG] Indicates condition of camera image signal.
DR-SIDE CAMERA IMAGE SIG [OK/
NG]
PA-SIDE CAMERA IMAGE SIG [OK/
NG]
ILL [ON/OFF] Indicates condition of illumination signal.
TURN SIGNAL [ON/OFF] Indicates condition of turn signal.
WORK SUPPORT
Support Item Setting Description

STATUS
CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE AXIS X

Performs calibration of front camera.
(FRONT CAMERA) AXIS Y
ROTATE

Support Item Setting Description
A
STATUS

Performs calibration of passenger side camera.
(PASS-SIDE CAMERA) AXIS Y B
ROTATE
STATUS
AXIS X C
CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE
Performs calibration of driver side camera.
(DR-SIDE CAMERA) AXIS Y
ROTATE
D
STATUS

Performs calibration of rear view camera.
(REAR CAMERA) AXIS Y E
ROTATE
STATUS
F
SELECT
Confirmation and adjustment of difference between each camera can be per-
FINE TUNING OF BIRDS-EYE VIEW AXIS X
formed.
AXIS Y G
ROTATE
STATUS
H
REAR WIDE-VIEW FIXED GUIDE AXIS X
Correct rear wide-view fixed guide line positions.
LINE CORRECTION AXIS Y
PATTERN I
ON
NON-VIEWABLE AREA REMINDER ON/OFF setting of non-viewable area can be performed.
OFF
ON
J
PREDICTIVE COURSE LINE
ON/OFF setting of predictive course line display can be performed.
DISPLAY OFF
INITIALIZE CAMERA IMAGE
— Factory image calibration restoration can be performed. K
CALIBRATION
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
— Steering angle sensor neutral position adjustment can be performed.
ADJUSTMENT
L
CAUSE OF ENTRY CANCEL — Cause item can be cancelled.
ON
MOD-FUNCTION ON/OFF setting of moving object detection (MOD) can be performed.
OFF M
CONFIGURATION
Refer to AV-404, "Description".
AV
O

AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]

AV CONTROL UNIT
List of ECU Reference INFOID:0000000015258847
ECU Reference
AV-170, "Reference Value"
AV control unit (NAVIGATION WITHOUT BOSE)
AV-173, "DTC Index"
AV-265, "Reference Value"
AV control unit (NAVIGATION WITH BOSE)
AV-268, "DTC Index"

AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
A
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL B

CAMERA switch ON. Off C
CAMERA OFF SIGNAL
CAMERA switch OFF. On
CAMERA switch OFF. Off
CAMERA SWITCH SIGNAL D
CAMERA switch ON. On
Side camera LH inoperative. NG
DR-SIDE CAMERA IMAGE SIG
Side camera LH operative. OK E
Front camera inoperative. NG
F-CAMERA IMAGE SIG
Front camera operative. OK
F
Illumination OFF. Off
ILL
Illumination ON. On
Side camera RH inoperative. NG G
PA-SIDE CAMERA IMAGE SIG
Side camera RH operative. OK
Rear view camera LH inoperative. NG
REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL H
Rear view camera LH operative. OK
When selector lever is in any position other than R (reverse). Off
REVERSE SIGNAL
When selector lever in R (reverse). On
I
Around view monitor control unit is not receiving steering angle
Off
sensor signal.
ST ANGLE SENSOR SIGNAL
Around view monitor control unit is receiving steering angle sen- J
On
sor signal.
ST ANGLE SENSOR TYPE Steering angle sensor type. Absolute
STEERING GEAR RATIO TYPE Steering gear ratio type. Type 0 K
Left hand drive vehicle. LHD
STEERING POSITION
Right hand drive vehicle. RHD
L
Turn signal OFF. Off
TURN SIGNAL
Turn signal ON. On
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL While driving, equivalent to speedometer reading mph, km/h M
TERMINAL LAYOUT
AV
P
AWNIA3807ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES

Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
3
— Video output shield — — —
(Shield)
[Ignition switch ON]

4
Ground Video output signal Output • CAMERA switch is ON or shift position
(G)
is R position
JSNIA0834GB
5
— Front camera ground — [Ignition switch ON] 0V
(V)
6 5 Front camera power
Output [Ignition switch ON] 6.0 V
(L) (V) supply
7 Front camera video
— — [Ignition switch ON] 0V
(Shield) ground

8 7 Front camera video
Input • CAMERA switch is ON or shift position
(LG) (Shield) signal
is R position
JSNIA0834GB
9 Door mirror RH cam-

(L) era ground
10 9 Door mirror RH cam-
(B) (L) era power supply
11 Door mirror RH cam-
(Shield) era video ground

12 11 Door mirror RH cam-
(Y) (Shield) era video signal
is R position
JSNIA0834GB
13 Door mirror LH cam-

(Y) era ground
14 13 Door mirror LH cam-
(L) (Y) era power supply
15 Door mirror LH cam-
(Shield) era video ground

16 15 Door mirror LH cam-
(G) (Shield) era video signal
is R position
JSNIA0834GB

Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
17 Rear view camera B
(B) ground
18 17 Rear view camera
(R) (B) power supply C
19 Rear view camera vid-
(Shield) eo ground
D

20 19 Rear view camera vid- E
(W) (Shield) eo signal
is R position
JSNIA0834GB F
24 Input/
— ITS CAN low — —
(R) Output
26 Input/ G
— ITS CAN high — —
(L) Output
39
— Ground — [Ignition switch ON] 0V
(B) H
40 39
Ignition signal Input [Ignition switch ON or START] 12.0 V
(SB) (B)
I
Fail-Safe INFOID:0000000015258849
DTC J
U0428: ST ANGLE SENSOR CAL- • Predicted course line is not displayed.
Neutral position adjustment of steering angle
IBRATION • MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is K
sensor is not complete.
stopped.
The following functions are stopped
• When communication of steering angle sen- L
sor signal is not normal:
When around view monitor control unit cannot
stopped. M
U1000: CAN COMM CIRCUIT transmit/receive CAN communication signal
• When communication of vehicle signal,
continuously for 2 seconds or more.
wheel speed sensor signal, and shift signal
is not normal:
- Predicted course line is not displayed. AV
stopped.
No-signal status of rear camera image signal is O
U111A: REAR CAMERA IMAGE
SIGNAL
switch is ON.
No-signal status of side camera RH image signal
U111B: SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE P
SIGNAL
switch is ON. Camera image is not displayed (gray screen
No-signal status of front camera image signal is display).
U111C: FRONT CAMERA IMAGE
SIGNAL
switch is ON.
No-signal status of side camera LH image signal
U111D: SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE
SIGNAL
switch is ON.

DTC
Neutral position adjustment of steering angle • Predicted course line is not displayed.
U1232: ST ANGLE SEN CALIB sensor is performed. NG signal from steering an- • MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
gle sensor is received. stopped.
Camera power supply voltage does not satisfy
the following conditions for 2 seconds or more
when ignition switch is turned ON:
U1302: CAMERA POWER VOLT • When supplemental lighting power supply out- Camera power output is stopped.
put is ON: 5.9 – 6.5 V.
• When OFF: 0 V by camera power supply mea-
surement.
• When camera calibration is incomplete.
• When camera information in around view Unmatched icon display (red) is displayed
U1304: CAMERA IMAGE CALIB
monitor control unit and information read from (applicable for unmatched camera only).
camera are not the same.
The vehicle setting of around view monitor con- Operation is according to the vehicle setting
U1305: CONFIG UNFINISH
trol unit is incomplete. value as default value.
When around view monitor control unit is not
Switch to camera screen is not allowed.
normal.
When communication between around view
monitor control unit and each camera is not nor- On applicable camera screen, marking
Other (Red) is displayed.
mal.
When communication line between around view
monitor control unit and each camera image line On applicable camera image screen, dis-
is affected by electromagnetic noises. play (Blue) is displayed.
DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000015258850
If multiple DTCs are detected simultaneously, check them one by one depending on the following DTC inspec-
tion priority chart:
Priority Detected items (DTC)

1 U1305: CONFIG UNFINISH
• U1000: CAN COMM CIRCUIT
2
• U1010: CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
• U0428: ST ANGLE SENSOR CALIBRATION
• U111A: REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL
• U111B: SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE SIGNAL
• U111C: FRONT CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL
3
• U111D: SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE SIGNAL
• U1232: ST ANGLE SEN CALIB
• U1302: CAMERA POWER VOLT
• U1304: CAMERA IMAGE CALIB
DTC CONSULT display Refer to

U0428 ST ANGLE SENSOR CALIBRATION AV-412, "DTC Description"
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT AV-414, "DTC Description"
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) AV-415, "DTC Description"
U111A REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL AV-416, "DTC Description"
U111B SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE SIGNAL AV-419, "DTC Description"
U111C FRONT CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL AV-423, "DTC Description"
U111D SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE SIGNAL AV-425, "DTC Description"
U1232 ST ANGLE SEN CALIB AV-429, "DTC Description"

DTC CONSULT display Refer to
A
U1302 CAMERA POWER VOLT AV-430, "DTC Description"
U1304 CAMERA IMAGE CALIB AV-435, "DTC Description"
U1305 CONFIG UNFINISH AV-436, "DTC Description" B
AV

AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
WIRING DIAGRAM
AANWA1805GB

AV
AANWA1806GB

AANIA5718GB

AV
AANIA5719GB

AANIA5720GB

AV
AANIA5721GB

AANIA5722GB

AV
AANIA5723GB

AANIA5724GB

AV
AANIA5725GB

AANIA5726GB

AV
AANIA5727GB

AANIA5728GB

< BASIC INSPECTION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
BASIC INSPECTION A
B
OVERALL SEQUENCE
C
JSNIA4482GB M
• Reference 1: Refer to AV-380, "CONSULT Function".

• Reference 2: Refer to AV-386, "DTC Index". AV
• Reference 3: Refer to AV-438, "Symptom Table".
DETAILED FLOW
O
1.INTERVIEW AND SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION
Check the malfunction symptoms by performing the following items:
• Interview the customer to obtain the malfunction information (conditions and environment when the malfunc- P
tion occurred).
• Check the symptom.
Is the occurred symptom a malfunction?
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.DIAGNOSIS WITH CONSULT
1. Connect CONSULT and perform a self-diagnosis for “AVM”. Refer to AV-380, "CONSULT Function".
NOTE:
Skip to step 4 of the diagnosis procedure if “AVM” is not displayed.
2. When DTC is detected, follow the instructions below:
- Record DTC and Freeze Frame Data (FFD).
Is DTC displayed?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4.
3.TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC
1. Check the DTC indicated in the “Self Diagnostic Result”.
2. Perform the relevant diagnosis referring to the DTC Index. Refer to AV-386, "DTC Index".
>> GO TO 5.
4.TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
Perform the relevant diagnosis referring to the diagnosis chart by symptom. Refer to AV-438, "Symptom
Table".
>> GO TO 5.
5.ERROR PART REPAIR
1. Repair or replace the identified malfunctioning parts.
2. Perform a self-diagnosis for “AVM”.
NOTE:
Erase the stored self-diagnosis results after repairing or replacing the relevant components if any DTC
has been indicated in the “Self Diagnostic Result”.
3. Check that the symptom does not occur.
Does the symptom occur?
YES >> GO TO 1.

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AROUND VIEW MONITOR CON-
TROL UNIT
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AROUND VIEW MONITOR
A
CONTROL UNIT
B
BEFORE REPLACEMENT
When replacing around view monitor control unit, save or print current vehicle specification with CONSULT
configuration before replacement. C
NOTE:
ing around view monitor control unit. D
AFTER REPLACEMENT
CAUTION:
When replacing around view monitor control unit, you must perform “After Replace ECU” with CON- E
SULT.
F
Work Procedure INFOID:0000000015258854
G
-CONSULT
Enter “Re/Programming, Configuration” and perform “Before Replace ECU” to save or print current vehicle H
specification.
NOTE:
If “Before Replace ECU” cannot be used, use the “After Replace ECU” or “Manual Configuration” after replac- I
ing around view monitor control unit.
>> GO TO 2. J
2.REPLACE AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-441, "Removal and Installation".
K
>> GO TO 3.
3.WRITING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION L
CONSULT
1. Enter "Re/Programming, Configuration".
2. If “Before Replace ECU” operation was performed, automatically an "Operation Log Selection" screen will M
specification. Refer to AV-404, "Work Procedure".
tion" to write vehicle specification. Refer to AV-404, "Work Procedure".
>> GO TO 4. O
4.OPERATION CHECK
Check that the operation of the around view monitor control unit and camera images (fixed guide lines and
predictive course lines) are normal. P
>> Work End.

CONFIGURATION (AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT)
CONFIGURATION (AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT)
Vehicle specification needs to be written with CONSULT because it is not written after replacing around view
Configuration has three functions as follows
• Reads the vehicle configuration of current around view monitor control unit.
READ CONFIGURATION
WRITE CONFIGURATION - Manual setting Writes the vehicle configuration with manual setting.
WRITE CONFIGURATION - Config file Writes the vehicle configuration with saved data.
CAUTION:
• When replacing around view monitor control unit, you must perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION” with
CONSULT.
• Never perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION” except for new around view monitor control unit.

CONSULT Configuration
Select “CONFIGURATION” of AVM.

2.PERFORM “WRITE CONFIGURATION - CONFIG FILE”
Perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION - Config file”.
>> Work End.

3.PERFORM “MANUAL CONFIGURATION”
Select “MANUAL CONFIGURATION” to write vehicle specifications into the around view monitor control unit.
CAUTION:
• Thoroughly read and understand the vehicle specification. Incorrect settings may result in abnormal
control of ECU.
• Make sure to select “NEXT” even if the default settings displayed on the CONSULT are the desired
settings. If “NEXT” is not selected, the configuration process will be incomplete.
NOTE:
If manual configuration items are not displayed, touch “NEXT”.
>> GO TO 4.
4.OPERATION CHECK
Confirm that each function controlled by around view monitor control unit operates normally.
>> Work End.

PREDICTIVE COURSE LINE CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT
PREDICTIVE COURSE LINE CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT
A
Adjust the center position of the predictive course line of the rear view monitor if it is shifted. B
1.DRIVING C
Drive the vehicle straight ahead 100 m (328.1 ft) or more at a speed of 30 km/h (18.6 MPH) or more.
D
>> End.
AV

CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND VIEW MONITOR)
• Calibration must be performed after removing/replacing the cameras, removing parts (e.g. front grille, door
mirror, and others) mounted on the cameras, or replacing the Around view monitor control unit.
• The use of CONSULT is required to perform calibration or writing of calibration results to the Around view
• Align the white lines on the road near the vehicle at the boundary of each camera image by this camera cal-
ibration. The white lines far from the vehicle may not be aligned at the boundary of each camera image. The
farther the line, the greater the difference is.
CALIBRATION FLOWCHART
Following the flowchart shown in the figure, perform the calibration.
JSNIA4210GB
NOTE:
View in the incomplete calibration state is indicated by “ ” on the
around view monitor.
AWNIA2590GB
CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
1.AROUND VIEW MONITOR SCREEN CONFIRMATION

Check that there is no indication of “Incomplete calibration”.
Is the “Incomplete calibration” display visible? A
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 4.
B
AWNIA2590GB
2.CHECK THAT AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT IS REPLACED D
Check that the around view monitor control unit is replaced.

Is the around view monitor control unit replaced? E
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 5.
3.CANCEL THE INDICATION OF INCOMPLETE CALIBRATION (PERFORM THIS ONLY AFTER REPLAC- F
ING AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT.)
CONSULT work support
1. On the CONSULT screen, touch “CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (FRONT CAMERA)”, “CALIBRATING G
CAMERA IMAGE (PASS-SIDE CAMERA)”, “CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (DR-SIDE CAMERA)”, or
“CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (REAR CAMERA)” to accept the selection.
NOTE: H
To cancel the indication of Incomplete calibration, select items based on the target camera.
2. On the adjustment screen of each camera, touch “APPLY” but-
ton. After this, touch “OK” button.
CAUTION: I
• Never perform operations other than those mentioned
above.
• Never perform “Initialize Camera Image Calibration”. J
3. Display the around view monitor screen to check that there is no
errors, such as deviations among the camera images.
Is there a malfunction? K
YES >> Calibration End.
NO >> GO TO 1. JSNIA4212ZZ
4.PERFORM SIMPLIFIED CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT BY “FINE TUNING OF BIRDS-EYE VIEW” L

1. Put target line 1 on the ground beside each axle using packing tape, etc.
2. Put target lines 2 equal to the vehicle total length + approximately 1.0 m (39.3 in) from the vehicle side
(right and left) at approximately 30 cm (11.8 in) away from the vehicle (make the line as parallel with the M
vehicle as possible).
AV

Preparation of simplified target line
JSNIA0927ZZ
1. Target lines 1 2. Target lines 2

A. Approx. 30 cm (11.8 in) B. Approx. 1.0 m (39.3 in)
3. CONSULT work support

Touch “FINE TUNING OF BIRDS-EYE VIEW” on the CONSULT screen.
4. On the CONSULT screen, touch “SELECT” button to select right or left camera and perform camera cali-
bration as instructed below:
- If the marker on the screen deviates from Target line 1, touch “AXIS X” button and “AXIS Y” button to
adjust so that the marker is placed on the Target line 1.
- If Target line 2 is misaligned among the cameras, adjust each camera image to bring Target line 2 into a
straight line.
CAUTION:
Never adjust the front camera and rear camera. Only adjust the right and left cameras.
Simplified target line adjustment method
JSNIA0929ZZ
1. Target lines 1 2. Target lines 2 3. Marker for target line 1

Crosshairs cursor (mark indicated
4. Boundary between cameras 5.
the selected camera)
Adjustment method for target lines 1 Adjustment method for target lines 2
A. B.
(right) (right)
5. Adjust right and left cameras. Touch "APPLY" on the CONSULT screen to display adjustment results.
6. After adjusting right and left cameras, check that the marker is properly placed on the screen and there is
no deviation in Target line 1.
NOTE:
• It can be initialized to the NISSAN factory default condition with “Initialize Camera Image Calibration”.
• The adjustment value is cancelled on this mode by performing “Initialize Camera Image Calibration”.

Is the difference corrected?
YES >> On the CONSULT screen, touch “OK” button to complete writing to the around view monitor con- A
trol unit.
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.PERFORM “CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE” B
Preparation of target line
1. Hang a string with a weight as shown in the figure. Put the points FM0, RM0 (mark) on the ground at the
center of the vehicle front end and rear end with white packing tape or a pen. C
2. Route the vinyl string under the vehicle, and then pull and fix it on the point approximately 1.0 m (39.9 in)
to the front and rear of the vehicle through the points FM0 and RM0 using packing tape.
Target line preparation procedure 1 D
AWNIA3140ZZ
I
1. Thread 2. Weight 3. Point FM0 (mark)
4. Point RM0 (mark) 5. Packing tape (to fix the vinyl string) 6. Vinyl string
3. Put the points FM and RM (mark) 75 cm (29.5 in) from the points FM0 and RM0 individually. J
4. Route the vinyl string through the points FM and RM using a triangle scale, and then fix it at approximately
1.5 m (59 in) on both sides with packing tape.
5. Put the points FL, FR, RL, and RR (mark) to both right and left [vehicle width / 2 + 30 cm (11.8 in)] from the K
points FM and RM.
Target line preparation procedure 2
L
AV
P
JSNIA0921ZZ
1. Point FM 2. Point RM 3. Triangle scale

4. Point FL (mark) 5. Point FR (mark) 6. Point RL (mark)

7. Point RR (mark)
30 cm (11.8 in)
A. 75 cm (29.5 in) B. Approx. 1.5 m (59 in) C. [Vehicle width/ 2 + 30 cm (11.8 in)
from the points FM and RM]
6. Draw the lines of the points FL – RL and FR – RR with vinyl string, and fix it with packing tape.
7. Put a mark on the center of each axle, draw vertical lines to the lines of the points FL – RL and FR – RR
from the marks on the center of the axle using a triangle scale, and then fix the lines using packing tape.
Target line preparation procedure 3
JSNIA0922ZZ
1. Point FL 2. Point FR 3. Point RL

4. Point RR 5. Center position of axle 6. Triangle scale
Perform “Calibrating Camera Image”

1. On the CONSULT screen, touch “CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (FRONT CAMERA)”, “CALIBRATING
CAMERA IMAGE (PASS-SIDE CAMERA)”, “CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (DR-SIDE CAMERA)”, or
“CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (REAR CAMERA)” to accept the selection.
NOTE:
To cancel the indication of Incomplete calibration, select items based on the target camera.
2. On the adjustment screen of each camera, adjust the parameter
by touching the “AXIS X” button, “AXIS Y” button, and
“ROTATE” button to place the calibration marker shown on the
camera screen on the target line drawn on the ground.
Adjustment range
Rotation direction (Center dial) : 31 patterns (16 on the center)
Upper/lower direction (upper/lower
: −22 – 22
switch)
Left/right direction (left/right switch) : −22 – 22
JSNIA4212ZZ
3. Touch “APPLY” button on the CONSULT screen. “PRCSNG” is
displayed and adjustment results are shown on the camera screen.
CAUTION:
Check that “PRCSNG” is displayed. Never perform other operations while “PRCSNG” is dis-
played.
4. Touch “OK” button on the CONSULT screen. “PRCSNG” is displayed and adjustment results are written to
the around view monitor control unit.
CAUTION:
Check that “PRCSNG” is displayed. Never perform other operations while “PRCSNG” is dis-
played.
>> GO TO 6.
6.PERFORM “FINE TUNING OF BIRDS-EYE VIEW”
This mode is designed to align the boundary between each camera image that could not be aligned in the
“Calibrating Camera Image” mode. A
1. Select “FINE TUNING OF BIRDS-EYE VIEW” by touching CONSULT screen.
2. On the adjustment screen of each camera, adjust the parameter B
by touching the “AXIS X” button, “AXIS Y” button”, and
“ROTATE” button to place the calibration marker shown on the
camera screen on the target line drawn on the ground.
NOTE: C
Touch “SELECT” button on the CONSULT screen to select the
target camera.
3. Touch “APPLY” button on the CONSULT screen. “PRCSNG” is D
displayed and adjustment results are shown on the camera
screen.
CAUTION:
Check that “PRCSNG” is displayed. Never perform other
JSNIA4214ZZ
E
operations while “PRCSNG” is displayed.
4. Touch “OK” button on the CONSULT screen. “PRCSNG” is displayed and adjustment results are written to
the around view monitor control unit. F
CAUTION:
• Check that “PRCSNG” is displayed. Never perform other operations while “PRCSNG” is dis-
played.
• After pressing the “OK” button, never press buttons other than the “BACK” button. G
NOTE:
• It can be initialized to the NISSAN factory default condition with “Initialize Camera Image Calibration”.
• The adjustment value is cancelled in this mode by performing “Initialize Camera Image Calibration”. H
>> Calibration End.

I
AV

U0428 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON
ST ANGLE SENSOR CALIBRA- Signal (terminal) —
U0428 TION
(Steering angle sensor calibration) Threshold —
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Neutral position adjustment of steering angle sensor is not complete
FAIL-SAFE
• Predicted course line is not displayed
• MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is stopped
1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY
If DTC U0428 is displayed with DTC U1232, first perform the diagnosis for DTC U1232.
YES >> Proceed to AV-429, "DTC Description".
NO >> GO TO 2.
CONSULT
2. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AVM” using.
3. Check DTC.
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: GI-54, "Intermittent Incident".
1.ADJUST THE NEUTRAL POSITION OF THE STEERING ANGLE SENSOR

When U0428 is detected, adjust the neutral position of the steering angle sensor.
Perform adjustment of the neutral position of the steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-77, "Work Procedure".
CAUTION:
For vehicles with VDC, adjust the steering angle sensor neutral position on the ABS actuator control
unit side.
>> GO TO 2.
CONSULT
2. Erase DTC.
3. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AVM” using.
4. Check DTC.

YES >> Replace steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-208, "Removal and Installation". A
AV

DESCRIPTION
control units during operation (not independently). In CAN communication, control units are connected with
two communication lines (CAN-H, CAN-L), allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
tion Signal Chart".
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CAN COMM CIRCUIT Signal (terminal) —

U1000
POSSIBLE CAUSE
FAIL-SAFE
• When communication of steering angle sensor signal is not normal:
- Predicted course line is not displayed
- MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is stopped
• When communication of vehicle signal, wheel speed sensor signal, and shift signal is not normal:
- Predicted course line is not displayed
- MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is stopped.
CONSULT
2. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AVM”.
3. Check DTC.

CONSULT
2. Erase DTC.
4. Check DTC.

A


U1010
[Control unit(CAN)] Threshold — D
POSSIBLE CAUSE E
Around view monitor control unit
FAIL-SAFE
— F

CONSULT
2. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AVM”. H
3. Check DTC.
YES >> Proceed to AV-415, "Diagnosis Procedure". I
J
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE K

CONSULT
2. Erase DTC. L
4. Check DTC.
M
YES >> Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-441, "Removal and Installation".
AV

U111A REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Signal (terminal) Rear camera image signal (terminal 20)
REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL
U111A Rear camera image signal circuit is shorted
(CAN COMM CIRCUIT) Threshold
or open
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Rear camera image signal circuit
FAIL-SAFE
Camera image is not displayed (gray screen display)
CONSULT
3. Check DTC.
Is DTC U111A detected?
1.CHECK REAR VIEW CAMERA POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector M112 and rear view camera connector D504.
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit connector M112 and rear view camera con-
nector D504.
Around view monitor control unit Rear view camera

Continuity
Connector Terminals Connector Terminals
17 1
M112 D504 Yes
18 2
4. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit connector M112 and ground.

Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M112 18 No

YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. A
2.CHECK REAR VIEW CAMERA POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector M112 and rear view camera connector D504.
B
3. Check voltage between around view monitor control unit connector M112 and ground.

C
Voltage
Ground Condition
CAMERA switch is ON or D
M112 18 — selector lever in R (re- 6.0 V
verse).
E
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-441, "Removal and Installation".
3.CHECK REAR VIEW CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL AND IMAGE SIGNAL GROUND CIRCUIT CONTINUITY F
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit connector M112 and rear view camera con- G
nector D504.
Around view monitor control unit Rear view camera H

Continuity
20 4
M112 D504 Yes I
19 5
J
Continuity
M112 20 No K
YES >> GO TO 4.
L
4.CHECK REAR VIEW CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector M112 and rear view camera connector D504. M
3. Check signal between the terminals of around view monitor control unit connector M112.
AV
Around view monitor control unit connector M112
Terminal Terminal O
P
CAMERA switch is ON or se-
20 19
lector lever in R (reverse).
JSNIA0834GB

NO >> Replace rear view camera. Refer to AV-444, "Removal and Installation".

U111B SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A

SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE SIG- Signal (terminal) Door mirror RH signal circuit (terminal 12)
U111B NAL Door mirror RH signal circuit is open or D
(Side camera right image signal) Threshold
shorted
E
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Side camera RH image signal circuit
FAIL-SAFE F
G
CONSULT
3. Check DTC.
Is DTC U111B detected? I
K
L
WITH AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR RH POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. M
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit M112 and door mirror RH connector D106.
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit connector M112 and door mirror RH connector
D106. AV
Around view monitor control unit Door mirror RH

Continuity
Connector Terminals Connector Terminals O
9 8
M112 D106 Yes
10 7
P

Continuity
M112 9 No

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR MIRROR RH POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector M112 and door mirror RH connector D106.
Around view monitor control unit Voltage

Ground Condition
CAMERA switch is ON or
verse).
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK DOOR MIRROR RH IMAGE SIGNAL AND IMAGE SIGNAL GROUND CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector M112 and door mirror RH connector D106.
D106.

Continuity
12 16
M112 D106 Yes
11 15

Continuity
M112 12 No
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK DOOR MIRROR RH IMAGE SIGNAL

Terminal Terminal

12 11
JSNIA0834GB

NO >> Replace side camera RH. Refer to AV-443, "Removal and Installation".
A
WITHOUT AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR RH POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CONTINUITY B
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit M112 and door mirror RH connector D107.
C
D107.

Continuity D
9 8
M112 D107 Yes
10 7 E
F
Continuity
M112 9 No G
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. H
2.CHECK DOOR MIRROR RH POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector M112 and door mirror RH connector D107. I
J
Ground Condition
CAMERA switch is ON or K
verse).
Is the inspection result normal? L
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK DOOR MIRROR RH IMAGE SIGNAL AND IMAGE SIGNAL GROUND CIRCUIT CONTINUITY M
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector M112 and door mirror RH connector D107.
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit connector M112 and door mirror RH connector AV
D107.
Around view monitor control unit Door mirror RH O

Continuity
12 16
M112 D107 Yes P
11 15

Continuity
M112 12 No

YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK DOOR MIRROR RH IMAGE SIGNAL

Terminal Terminal

12 11
JSNIA0834GB

NO >> Replace side camera RH. Refer to AV-443, "Removal and Installation".

U111C FRONT CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A

FRONT CAMERA IMAGE SIG- Signal (terminal) Front view camera image signal (terminal 8)
U111C NAL Front camera image signal circuit is open or D
(Front camera image signal) Threshold
shorted
E
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Front camera image signal circuit
FAIL-SAFE F
G
CONSULT
3. Check DTC.
Is DTC U111C detected? I
K
L
1.CHECK FRONT CAMERA POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector M112 and front camera connector E226. M
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit connector M112 and front camera connector
E226.
AV
Around view monitor control unit Front camera
Continuity
6 1 O
M112 E226 Yes
5 2
P

Continuity
M112 6 No
YES >> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK FRONT CAMERA POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector M112 and front camera connector E226.

Ground Condition
verse).
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK FRONT CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL AND IMAGE SIGNAL GROUND CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector M112 and front camera connectors E226.
E226.
Around view monitor control unit Front camera

Continuity
8 3
M112 E226 Yes
7 4

Continuity
M112 8 No
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK FRONT CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector M112 and front camera connector E226.

Terminal Terminal

8 7
JSNIA0834GB

NO >> Replace front camera. Refer to AV-442, "Removal and Installation".
U111D SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A

SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE SIG- Signal (terminal) Side camera LH image signal (terminal 16)
U111D NAL Side camera LH image signal circuit is open D
(Side camera left image signal) Threshold
or shorted
E
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Side camera LH image signal circuit
FAIL-SAFE F
G
CONSULT
3. Check DTC.
Is DTC U111D detected? I
K
L
WITH AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR LH POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. M
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit M112 and door mirror LH connector D16.
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit connector M112 and door mirror LH connector
D16. AV
Around view monitor control unit Door mirror LH

Continuity
Connector Terminals Connector Terminals O
14 7
M112 D16 Yes
13 8
P

Continuity
M112 14 No

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR MIRROR LH POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector M112 and door mirror LH connector D16.

Ground Condition
verse).
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK DOOR MIRROR LH IMAGE SIGNAL AND IMAGE SIGNAL GROUND CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector M112 and door mirror LH connector D16.
D16.

Continuity
16 16
M112 D16 Yes
15 15

Continuity
M112 16 No
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK DOOR MIRROR LH IMAGE SIGNAL

Terminal Terminal

16 15
JSNIA0834GB

NO >> Replace side camera LH. Refer to AV-443, "Removal and Installation".
A
WITHOUT AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR LH POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CONTINUITY B
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit M112 and door mirror LH connector D14.
C
D14.

Continuity D
14 7
M112 D14 Yes
13 8 E
F
Continuity
M112 14 No G
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. H
2.CHECK DOOR MIRROR LH POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector M112 and door mirror LH connector D14. I
J
Ground Condition
CAMERA switch is ON or K
verse).
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK DOOR MIRROR LH IMAGE SIGNAL AND IMAGE SIGNAL GROUND CIRCUIT CONTINUITY M
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector M112 and door mirror LH connector D14.
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit connector M112 and door mirror LH connector AV
D14.
Around view monitor control unit Door mirror LH O

Continuity
16 16
M112 D14 Yes P
15 15

Continuity
M112 16 No

YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK DOOR MIRROR LH IMAGE SIGNAL

Terminal Terminal

16 15
JSNIA0834GB

NO >> Replace side camera LH. Refer to AV-443, "Removal and Installation".

A

ST ANGLE SEN CALIB Signal (terminal) —

U1232
(Steering angle sensor calibration) Threshold — D
POSSIBLE CAUSE E
• Neutral position adjustment of the steering angle sensor is incomplete
• Steering angle sensor
FAIL-SAFE F
Predictive course line is not displayed
G
CONSULT
2. Select “Self diagnostic result” mode of “AVM”.
3. Check DTC.
1.ADJUST THE PREDICTIVE COURSE LINE CENTER POSITION OF THE STEERING ANGLE SENSOR K
Adjust the steering angle sensor neutral position on ABS actuator and electrical unit (control unit) side. Refer
to BRC-77, "Work Procedure".
L
NOTE:
When DTC U1232 is detected, adjust the predictive course line center position of the steering angle sensor.
M
>> GO TO 2.
CONSULT AV
2. Erase DTC.
3. Select “Self diagnostic result” mode of “AVM”. O
4. Check DTC.
YES >> Replace steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-208, "Removal and Installation". P

U1302 CAMERA POWER VOLT
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Signal (terminal) Camera power supply circuits
CAMERA POWER VOLT
U1302 Camera power supply voltage is 5.9 V-6.5 V
(Camera power voltage) Threshold
when ON, or 0 V when OFF
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Camera power supply output circuit
• Around view monitor control unit
FAIL-SAFE
Camera power output is stopped
CONSULT
3. Check DTC.
1.CHECK CAMERA DATA MONITOR

CONSULT
Check CAMERA IMAGE SIG for each camera in “Data Monitor” of “AVM”.
Is “OK” displayed for all cameras?
YES >> Refer to GI-54, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-1 (Front camera)>>GO TO 2.
NO-2 (Rear view camera)>>GO TO 4.
NO-3 (LH side camera with automatic drive positioner)>>GO TO 6.
NO-4 (LH side camera without automatic drive positioner)>>GO TO 8.
NO-5 (RH side camera with automatic drive positioner)>>GO TO 10.
NO-6 (RH side camera without automatic drive positioner)>>GO TO 12.
2.CHECK FRONT CAMERA POWER SUPPLY AND POWER SUPPLY GROUND CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector M112 and front camera connector E226.
E226.

Around view monitor control unit Front camera A

Continuity
6 1
M112 E226 Yes B
5 2
C
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
D
M112 6 — No
YES >> GO TO 3. E
3.CHECK AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE (FRONT CAMERA)
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector M112 and front camera connector E226. F
3. Check voltage between around view monitor control unit connector M112 terminals.
G
Around view monitor control unit M112
Voltage
(+) (−) Condition
(Approx.) H
Terminal Terminal
CAMERA switch is ON or shift
6 5 6.2 V
position is “D”.
I
YES >> Replace front camera. Refer to AV-442, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-441, "Removal and Installation". J
4.CHECK REAR VIEW CAMERA POWER SUPPLY AND POWER SUPPLY GROUND CIRCUIT CONTINU-
ITY
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. K
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit connector M112 and rear view camera con-
nector D504. L
Around view monitor control unit Rear view camera

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M
18 2
M112 D504 Yes
17 1
AV
Around view monitor control unit O

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
M112 18 — No
P
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE (REAR CAMERA)
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector M112 and rear view camera connector D504.

Voltage
(+) (−) Condition
(Approx.)
Terminal Terminal
18 17 6.2 V
position is “R”.
YES >> Replace rear view camera. Refer to AV-444, "Removal and Installation".
6.CHECK LH SIDE CAMERA (WITH AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER) POWER SUPPLY AND POWER
SUPPLY GROUND CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector M112 and LH side camera connector D16.
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit connector M112 and LH side camera connec-
tor D16.
Around view monitor control unit LH side camera

Continuity
14 7
M112 D16 Yes
13 8

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
M112 14 — No
YES >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE (LH SIDE CAMERA WITH AUTOMATIC
DRIVE POSITIONER)
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector M112 and LH side camera connector D16.

Voltage
(+) (−) Condition
(Approx.)
Terminal Terminal
14 13 6.2 V
position is “D” or “R”.
YES >> Replace LH side camera. Refer to AV-443, "Removal and Installation".
8.CHECK LH SIDE CAMERA (WITHOUT AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER) POWER SUPPLY AND POW-
ER SUPPLY GROUND CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector M112 and LH side camera connector D14.
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit connector M112 and LH side camera connec-
tor D14.

Around view monitor control unit LH side camera A

Continuity
14 7
M112 D14 Yes B
13 8
C
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
D
M112 14 — No
YES >> GO TO 9. E
9.CHECK AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE (LH SIDE CAMERA WITHOUT AUTO-
MATIC DRIVE POSITIONER) F
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector M112 and LH side camera connector D14.
3. Check voltage between around view monitor control unit connector M112 terminals. G

Voltage H
(+) (−) Condition
(Approx.)
Terminal Terminal
14 13
6.2 V I

YES >> Replace LH side camera. Refer to AV-443, "Removal and Installation". J
10.CHECK RH SIDE CAMERA (WITH AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER) POWER SUPPLY AND POWER
SUPPLY GROUND CIRCUIT CONTINUITY K
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector M112 and RH side camera connector D106.
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit connector M112 and RH side camera connec- L
tor D106.
Around view monitor control unit RH side camera M

Continuity
10 7
M112 D106 Yes AV
9 8
O
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
M112 10 — No P
YES >> GO TO 11.
11.CHECK AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE (RH SIDE CAMERA WITH AUTOMATIC
DRIVE POSITIONER)

1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector M112 and RH side camera connector D106.

Voltage
(+) (−) Condition
(Approx.)
Terminal Terminal
10 9 6.2 V
12.CHECK RH SIDE CAMERA (WITHOUT AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER) POWER SUPPLY AND
POWER SUPPLY GROUND CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector M112 and RH side camera connector D107.
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit connector M112 and RH side camera connec-
tor D107.
Around view monitor control unit RH side camera

Continuity
10 7
M112 D107 Yes
9 8

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
M112 10 — No
YES >> GO TO 13.
13.CHECK AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE (RH SIDE CAMERA WITHOUT AUTO-
MATIC DRIVE POSITIONER)
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector M112 and RH side camera connector D107.

Voltage
(+) (−) Condition
(Approx.)
Terminal Terminal
10 9 6.2 V

U1304 CAMERA IMAGE CALIBRATION
U1304 CAMERA IMAGE CALIBRATION
A

CAMERA IMAGE CALIB Signal (terminal) —

U1304
(Camera image calibration) Threshold — D
POSSIBLE CAUSE E
Camera calibration is incomplete
FAIL-SAFE
F
Unmatched icon display (red) is displayed (applicable for unmatched camera only)
CONSULT
H
3. Check DTC.
I
J
1.PERFORM CALIBRATION K
When U1304 is detected, perform calibration of camera image.
>> Refer to AV-406, "Work Procedure". L
AV

U1305 CONFIG UNFINISH
U1305 CONFIG UNFINISH
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONFIG UNFINISH Signal (terminal) —

U1305
(Configuration unfinish) Threshold —
POSSIBLE CAUSE
The vehicle setting of around view monitor control unit is incomplete
FAIL-SAFE
Operation is according to the vehicle setting value as default value
CONSULT
3. Check DTC.
When U1305 is detected, perform configuration of around view monitor control unit.
>> Refer to AV-404, "Work Procedure".

A
B
1.CHECK FUSE
Check that the following fuses are not blown. C

40 Ignition signal 30 (10A) D
NO >> GO TO 2. E
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector M112. F
Around view monitor control unit Voltage G

Ground Condition
M112 40 — Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage

H
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. I
2. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit connector M112 and ground. J

Ground Continuity
M112 39 — Yes
M
AV

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
Symptom Check items Probable malfunction location

“AVM” is not displayed on the system selection screen of power supply or ground circuit. Re-
CONSULT. fer to AV-437, "Diagnosis Proce-
dure".
Screen is not switched to camera CAMERA SWITCH SIGNAL Around view monitor control unit.
image when CAMERA button is and REVERSE SIGNAL are Refer to AV-441, "Removal and In-
Check that Data Monitor item
pressed or when shift position is normal. stallation".
values are normal using
shifted to “R”. CONSULT: CAN communication circuit. Refer
CAMERA SWITCH SIGNAL
• CAMERA SWITCH SIG- to LAN-26, "Trouble Diagnosis
is not normal.
NAL Flow Chart".
• REVERSE SIGNAL
REVERSE SIGNAL is not Reverse signal circuit. Refer to AV-
normal. 383, "Reference Value".
Check the following Data
• Front view screen is not dis- Front camera power supply circuit
Monitor item using CON-
played. F-CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL: and image signal circuit.
SULT:
• Front of around view screen is NG Refer to AV-423, "Diagnosis Proce-
• F-CAMERA IMAGE SIG-
not displayed. dure".
NAL
• The rear view screen is not dis- Rear camera power supply circuit
played. REAR CAMERA IMAGE and image signal circuit.
SULT:
• Rear of around view screen is SIGNAL: NG Refer to AV-416, "Diagnosis Proce-
• REAR CAMERA IMAGE
not displayed. dure".
SIGNAL
Side camera LH power supply cir-
LH side of around view screen is DR-SIDE CAMERA IMAGE cuit and image signal circuit.
SULT:
not displayed. SIGNAL: NG Refer to AV-419, "Diagnosis Proce-
• DR-SIDE CAMERA IM-
dure".
AGE SIGNAL
• Front-side view screen is not
Monitor item using CON- Side camera RH power supply cir-
displayed. PA-SIDE CAMERA IMAGE
SULT: cuit and image signal circuit. Refer
• RH side of around view screen SIGNAL: NG
• PA-SIDE CAMERA IMAGE to AV-419, "Diagnosis Procedure".
is not displayed.
SIGNAL

AV CONTROL UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]

AV CONTROL UNIT
B
AWNIA3339ZZ J

K
REMOVAL
CAUTION: L
cation. Refer to AV-404, "Description".
NOTE:
O
sary).
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:

AV CONTROL UNIT
• When replacing AV control unit, perform "WRITE CONFIGURATION". Refer to AV-290, "CONFIGURA-
TION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Description".
• When replacing AV control unit, the AV control unit must be registered. Refer to AV-289, "ADDI-
TIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AV CONTROL UNIT : Description".

A
AWNIA3694ZZ
G
1. Around view monitor control unit A. Harness connector

H
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Before replacing around view monitor control unit, save or print current vehicle specification with I
CONSULT configuration before replacement. Refer to AV-404, "Description".
1. Remove glove box assembly. Refer to IP-23, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove around view monitor control unit screws. J
3. Disconnect the harness connector from the around view monitor control unit and remove.
INSTALLATION K
CAUTION:
• Replace the around view monitor control unit if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
• When replacing around view monitor control unit, you must perform "After Replace ECU" with CON- L
SULT. Refer to AV-290, "CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Description".
• Perform camera image calibration. Refer to AV-289, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AV
CONTROL UNIT : Description". M
AV

FRONT CAMERA
FRONT CAMERA
ALOIA0238ZZ
1. Front grille 2. Front camera
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front grille. Refer to EXT-33, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove screws and front camera.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Perform camera image calibration. Refer to AV-406, "Description".

SIDE CAMERA
SIDE CAMERA
A
REMOVAL B
1. Remove door mirror rear finisher (2). Refer to MIR-27, "Removal
and Installation".
2. Remove screws (A) and side camera (1). C
: Pawl
E
ALLIA1383ZZ
INSTALLATION F
CAUTION:
G
AV

REAR VIEW CAMERA
REAR VIEW CAMERA
REMOVAL
1. Remove back door outer upper finisher. Refer to EXT-63, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove rear view camera screws (A), then remove rear view
camera (1) from the back door outer upper finisher (2).
ALNIA1427ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: D
see the SR section.
F
ness connectors.
G
WARNING:
J
• Use the tester with its open terminal voltage being 7.0 V or less. K
L
M
must be within 110 mm (4.33 in).]
AV
P
PKIA0306E

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
twisted line will be lost.)
PKIA0307E
- Oily dirt:
area.

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools INFOID:0000000014844610
B
(TechMate No.) C
Tool name
(J-46534) D
Trim Tool Set
AWJIA0483ZZ
F
G
H
PIIB1407E
AV

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
ALNIA2063ZZ

1. Rear view camera Refer to AV-449, "Rear View Camera".
3. Transmission range switch Refer to TM-17, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Transmission Range Switch".
4. IPDM E/R Refer to PCS-6, "Component Parts Location".
6. Steering angle sensor Refer to AV-449, "Steering Angle Sensor".
Description

COMPONENT PARTS
• AM/FM electronic tuner radio, CD drive and camera controller are
integrated into the audio unit. A
• The display can show audio status and rear view monitor images.
ALNIA1592ZZ
D
Rear View Camera INFOID:0000000015258887
• The rear camera is installed next to the rear licence plate lamp.
• Power for the camera is supplied from the audio unit, and the E
image at the rear of the vehicle is sent to the audio unit display.
JSNIA6012ZZ
H
Steering Angle Sensor INFOID:0000000015258888
• Steering angle sensor is installed to the spiral cable.

• Steering angle sensor sends the steering signal necessary for pre- I
dictive course line to the combination meter via CAN communica-
tion.
• Combination meter sends the steering signal to the audio unit via J
AV communication.
JSNIA1571ZZ
L
AV

SYSTEM
SYSTEM
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
AWNIA4586GB
DESCRIPTION
Operation Description
• When the selector lever is shifted to the reverse position, the rear view monitor image is displayed.
• When the selector lever is shifted to any position other than the reverse position, the original image (the
image displayed before the rear view monitor image) is displayed.
Camera Image Operation Principle
• The audio unit receives the reverse signal input and supplies power to the rear view camera.
• The rear view camera supplies the image signal to the audio unit.
• The audio unit displays the rear view camera image when the reverse signal is received.
• The audio unit generates the warning message, vehicle width guide lines and the predicted course lines on
the image from the rear view camera.
Vehicle Width Guide Lines and Predicted Course Lines Display Function
• The vehicle width guide lines and the predicted course lines that indicate the vehicle route according to the
steering angle are displayed to allow the driver to more easily judge distances between the vehicle and
objects and to help the driver back into a parking space.
• The audio unit receives the steering signal from the steering sensor via AV communication from the combi-
nation meter and draws a vehicle width guide line according to the steering angle.
• Vehicle width guide lines are displayed translucently.
• The predicted course lines are not displayed when the steering is in the neutral position.
JSNIA3994GB

SYSTEM
Precautions for Vehicle Width Guide Lines and Predicted Course Lines
Vehicle width guide lines and predicted course lines displayed may be different from actual lines depending on A
vehicle conditions and road conditions.
Precautions for road conditions
• Since vehicle width guide lines and predicted course lines are drawn based on the road, a different distance B
may be displayed if uphill or downhill gradient is present nearby.
JSNIA3995GB
AV
Precautions for block

O

SYSTEM
• Since vehicle width guide lines and predicted course lines are drawn based on the road, a different distance
may be displayed if a projecting obstacle is present nearby.
JSNIA3996GB

A
The audio unit on board diagnosis performs the functions listed in the table below: B
Mode Description
• Audio unit diagnosis. C
Self Diagnosis
Display Diagnosis
D
Vehicle Signals
E
Confirmation/
Adjustment F
AV COMM Diagnosis
monitored.
G
Initialize Setting Initializes the audio unit memory. H
I
METHOD OF STARTING
J
BACK button. K
M
AWNIA4585ZZ
4. The trouble diagnosis initial screen is displayed, and Self Diag- AV

JSNIA0138GB
SELF DIAGNOSIS MODE


diagnosis.
AWNIA2630GB

Normal Green Green
Connection malfunction Gray Yellow

of priority: red > gray.
sis result screen.
JSNIA1870ZZ

cuits.
Malfunction is detected in audio unit power sis Procedure".
Control unit


1. Select Confirmation/Adjustment. A
B
AWNIA3343ZZ
H
Display Diagnosis
AWNIA2632GB
Vehicle Signals AV
O
AWNIA3344ZZ
Speaker Test

Start to generate a test tone in a speaker. Press Start again to gener-
AWNIA2634GB
Error History
However, the diagnosis results are judged normal if an error has occurred before the ignition switch is turned
The frequency of occurrence is displayed in a count up manner. The actual count up method differs depending
on the error item.
Count up method A
• The counter is set to 40 if an error occurs. 1 is subtracted from the counter if the condition is normal at a next
ignition ON cycle.
Count up method B
• The counter upper limit is 50. Any counts exceeding 50 are ignored. The counter can be reset (no error

Error history display item
frequency
Error item

AV COMM CIRCUIT
Camera System

view camera. A
AWNIA2635GB
D
AV COMM Diagnosis
• The error counter displays OK if any malfunction was not detected E
The upper limit of the counter is 39. F
Status Counter
Items G
(Current) (Past)
AWNIA2636GB
C Tx(ITM-TW SW) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39 H
NOTE:
“???” indicates UNKWN. I
audio unit memory (clears the records of the unit that has been J
removed).
AWNIA2637GB
M
Version Information
AV
AWNIA3346ZZ
Initialize Settings

JSNIA0155GB

AUDIO UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]

AUDIO UNIT
List of ECU Reference INFOID:0000000015258892
B
ECU Reference
C
Audio unit (DISPLAY AUDIO WITHOUT BOSE) AV-26, "Reference Value"
Audio unit (DISPLAY AUDIO WITH BOSE) AV-89, "Reference Value"
D
AV

< WIRING DIAGRAM > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
WIRING DIAGRAM
AANWA1824GB

AV
AANIA5783GB

AANIA5784GB

AV
AANIA5785GB

AANIA5786GB

AV
AANIA5787GB

AANIA5788GB

< BASIC INSPECTION > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
BASIC INSPECTION A
AUDIO SYSTEM
B
AUDIO SYSTEM : Work Flow INFOID:0000000015258893
OVERALL SEQUENCE C
M
ALNIA0182GB
Reference 1···Refer to AV-472, "Symptom Table".

AV
DETAILED FLOW
1.CHECK SYMPTOM
Check the malfunction symptoms by performing the following items. O
• Interview the customer to obtain the malfunction information (conditions and environment when the malfunc-
tion occurred).
• Check the symptom. P
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DIAGNOSIS BY SYMPTOM
Perform the relevant diagnosis referring to the diagnosis chart by symptom. Refer to AV-472, "Symptom
Table".

< BASIC INSPECTION > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
>> GO TO 3.
3.REPAIR OR REPLACE MALFUNCTIONING PARTS
Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
>> GO TO 4.
4.FINAL CHECK
Perform the operation to check that the malfunction symptom is solved or any other symptoms are present.
Is there any symptom?
YES >> GO TO 2.

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
AUDIO UNIT
B
C
D
1.CHECK FUSE
E
19 Battery power supply 16 (20A) F
G
NO >> GO TO 2.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. H
I
Audio unit Voltage
Ground Condition
7 Ignition switch: ON J
K
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT L
3. Check continuity between audio unit connectors and ground. M
Audio unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal AV
M83 20
— Yes
M87 52
Is the inspection result normal? O
P

REAR VIEW CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.CHECK REVERSE INPUT SIGNAL

2. Shift the selector lever to R (reverse).
Audio unit Ground

Voltage
(+) Condition
(−) (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M87 58 — Battery Voltage
verse)
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK CAMERA POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
2. Disconnect audio unit connector M87 and rear view camera connector D504.
3. Check continuity between audio unit connector M87 and rear view camera connector D504.
Audio unit Rear view camera

Continuity
M87 42 D504 2 Yes
Audio unit
Continuity
M87 42 No
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK CAMERA POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE
1. Connect audio unit connector M87 and rear view camera connector D504.
Audio unit Ground

Voltage
(+) Condition
(−) (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M87 42 — Selector lever is in “R”. 6.0 V
YES >> GO TO 4.

4.CHECK CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY A

2. Disconnect audio unit connector M87 and rear view camera connector D504.
3. Check continuity between audio unit connector M87 and rear view camera connector D504.
B
Audio unit Rear view camera

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal C
M87 43 D504 4 Yes
D
Audio unit
Continuity
E
M87 43 No
YES >> GO TO 5. F
5.CHECK CAMERA GROUND CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
G
Check continuity between audio unit connector M87 and rear view camera connector D504.
Audio unit Rear view camera H

Continuity
M87 41 D504 1 Yes
Is inspection result normal? I
YES >> GO TO 6.
J
6.CHECK CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL
1. Connect audio unit connector M87 and rear view camera connector D504.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. K
L
Audio unit Ground
(+) Condition Reference value
(−)
AV
Camera image dis-
M87 43 —
played.
O
SKIB2251J

P
NO >> Replace rear view camera. Refer to AV-474, "Removal and Installation".

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
Symptom Possible cause Inspection item

• Harness between rear view camera and
Camera image is not shown.
audio unit Camera image signal circuit.
(Vehicle width and predictive course line are
• Rear view camera Refer to AV-470, "Diagnosis Procedure".
displayed.)
• Audio unit
• Harness between BCM and audio unit
Reverse signal circuit.
Camera image does not switch. • Audio unit
• BCM

AUDIO UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]

AUDIO UNIT
B
AWNIA3340ZZ J

K
REMOVAL
L
3. Remove instrument finisher B. Refer to IP-16, "INSTRUMENT FINISHER B : Removal and Installation". M
6. Disconnect the harness connectors from the audio unit and remove. AV
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. O
CAUTION:
When replacing audio unit, the audio unit must be registered. Refer to AV-44, "REGISTRATION (AUDIO
UNIT) : Description". P

REAR VIEW CAMERA
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
REAR VIEW CAMERA
REMOVAL
1. Remove back door outer upper finisher. Refer to EXT-63, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove rear view camera screws (A), then remove rear view
camera (1) from the back door outer upper finisher (2).
ALNIA1427ZZ
INSTALLATION

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [TELEMATICS SYSTEM]
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: D
see the SR section.
F
ness connectors.
G
WARNING:
J
Unit) INFOID:0000000014844629
CAUTION:
Remove battery terminal and AV control unit 30 seconds or more after turning the ignition switch OFF. K
NOTE:
Therefore, data corruption may occur if battery voltage is cut off within 30 seconds. L
AV COMMUNICATION SYSTEM M
• Be sure to turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal before AV
O
P

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [TELEMATICS SYSTEM]
must be within 110 mm (4.33 in).]
PKIA0306E
twisted line will be lost.)
PKIA0307E
- Oily dirt:
area.

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [TELEMATICS SYSTEM]
PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
B
(TechMate No.) C
Tool name
(J-46534) D
Trim Tool Set
AWJIA0483ZZ
F
G
PIIB1407E
AV

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [TELEMATICS SYSTEM]
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
ALNIA2047ZZ

1. Telematics switch Refer to AV-480, "Telematics Switch".
2. TCU Refer to AV-479, "TCU".
3. Telematics antenna Refer to AV-479, "Telematics Antenna".
Description

COMPONENT PARTS
and navigation unit are integrated into the AV control unit. A
• AV control unit is connected to TCU with the USB harness, and
signals necessary for Telematics function and NissanConnectSM
function are sent and received. B
ALNIA1590ZZ
D
TCU INFOID:0000000015258900
• TCU is abbreviation of Telematics Communication Unit.

• It is installed at the back of the glove box cover assembly. E
• A radio communication terminal and SIM card are built into the unit
and data is sent and received in SMS*, DTMF tone signal with the
NissanConnect center through the TEL antenna. F
NOTE:
*: SMS stands for Short Message Service. It is also referred to as
Text Messaging, Short Mail, etc. It is the service that performs text
G
based message communication.
• It is connected to the AV control unit with the USB harness for
sound signal input/output and USB communication.
• It is connected to the airbag diagnosis sensor unit. TCU performs JSNIA7225ZZ
H
an emergency report when the air bag is inflated.
• VIN information necessary for the Telematics service is memorized.
• Audio signals received during SOS/Operator call are transmitted from TCU to each speaker via the AV con- I
trol unit.
• During the communication with NissanConnect center, TCU transmits a TEL ON signal to the AV control unit
to prohibit the use of Bluetooth® hands-free phone.
J
Telematics Antenna INFOID:0000000015258901
• The telematics antenna consists of TEL antenna and GPS antenna. K

• It is installed in the instrument panel.
NOTE:
The placement of an object on the instrument panel may cause
desensitization in the receiver sensitivity. L
AV
JSNIA5830ZZ

COMPONENT PARTS
Telematics Switch INFOID:0000000015258902
• The Telematics switch is located on the map lamp assembly.

• The Telematics switch is connected to TCU and transmits an oper-
ation signal.
• The state of LED (ON/Blink/OFF) shows the status of SOS call.
LED ON :SOS Call available

LED Blink :SOS Call in communication
LED OFF :Out of service area or system error
JSNIA5899ZZ
• Microphone is installed on the map lamp assembly.

• The microphone is used for the operation of the NissanConnect,
hands-free phone system, voice recognition function.
• The power is supplied from the TCU to the microphone, transmit-
ting sound signals to the TCU at the during operation of the Nis-
sanConnect system, hands-free phone communication, and voice
recognition.
JSNIA6009ZZ

SYSTEM
SYSTEM
A
SYSTEM DIAGRAM B
L
AWNIA4587GB
TCU Input Signal (CAN Communication) M
Transmit unit Signal name

Engine status signal AV
ECM Malfunction indicator lamp signal
Engine oil pressure warning lamp signal
ABS warning lamp signal O
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
VDC warning lamp signal
Combination meter Brake warning lamp signal
P
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit Car crash information signal
Auto ACC signal
BCM Door lock status signal
Sleep wake up signal
DESCRIPTION

SYSTEM
• The Telematics system is a system for providing information by connecting the vehicle and the user to the
NissanConnect center.
• TCU (Telematics Communication Unit) equipped with a radio communication terminal communicates with
the information center (NissanConnect center) via radio waves for receiving NissanConnect services.
• With the equipment of the radio communication terminal, TCU communicate with NissanConnect center by
Packet communication*1 and SMS*2 via TEL antenna mounted on the Telematics antenna.
NOTE:
• *1: Packet communication means a communication method that data are broken down into smaller chunks
for communication. The split data is called a packet and improves the efficiency of the communication cir-
cuit.
• *2: SMS stands for Short Message Service, also known as text messaging or short mail, and provides text-
based message communication services.
• While communicating with the operator, data (e.g. transmission of own vehicle location) are transmitted to
the NissanConnect Service Center by using DTMF tone signals and SMS via the radio communication mod-
ule included in TCU.
• Audio signals transmitted and received while communicating with the operator are input by the microphone
connected to TCU.
• Audio signals are output from TCU via the audio data circuit connected to the AV control unit.
Fail-safe INFOID:0000000015259881
If a malfunction occurs in the telematics system, TCU performs fail-safe activation according to the detected
malfunction.
Detection item Telematics system operation in fail-safe mode DTC

• Some telematics system does not function.
Air-bag connection U1A10
• Inform a NissanConnect center about abnormality.
• Telematics system does not function.
CAN communication U1000
• Telematics switch LED indicator turn OFF.
(LED indicator turns ON 10 times when push the SOS call switch.)
TEL antenna U1A06
• When operated a telematics system, inform that cannot be connected to the Nissan-
Connect center.
• Telematics system cannot send correct positional information. U1A09
GPS antenna
• Inform a NissanConnect center about abnormality. U1A0A
USB communication B13D9
B1310
B130D
B2EF0-16
B2EF0-49
Telematics system function stops. B2EF0-4A
B2EF0-4B
TCU U1010
U1A01
U1A02
• Telematics system function stops.
U1A03
U1A11
Connect center.
Telematics switch • Telematics system does not function. (Only SOS call does not operate.) B2E33
(SOS call switch) • Telematics switch LED indicator is turned OFF. U1A0E
• Transmit an own vehicle position to the NissanConnect center.
Microphone U1A0B
VIN Telematics service does not function. U1A04

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCU)
A
APPLICABLE ITEMS B
CONSULT performs the following items by communication with TCU:
Diagnosis mode Description C

Self-Diagnosis Result Performs the diagnosis of TCU and displays the current and past malfunctions collectively.
Data Monitor The diagnosis of the vehicle signal that is input to TCU can be performed.
Work support Performs TCU activation setting and center connection setting. D
ECU identification Checks TCU part number and various ID numbers.
• The vehicle specification that is written in TCU can be displayed or stored
Configuration E
• The vehicle specification can be written when TCU is replaced
SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT
Refer to AV-488, "DTC Index". F
• In CONSULT self-diagnosis, the self-diagnosis results and error history are displayed collectively.
• The current malfunction indicates “0”. The counter increases by 1 if the condition is normal at the next power
switch ON cycle. G
DATA MONITOR
NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable H
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.
Display item Display Condition Note

I
HF TYPE BT/NO BT —
AUDIO/NAVI/NO
AUDIO UNIT TYPE —
NAVI J
CALL SWITCH TYPE SOS/OP —
SPEAKER TYPE INDRCT —
Indicates state of configuration result.
ZONE PRC — NOTE:
K
CHANNEL NISSAN — This item is displayed, but not used.
CAN COMM GEN.3/GEN.5 —

L
AV COMM ENABLE/DISABLE —
K-LINE ENABLE/DISABLE —
VEHICLE TYPE ENG — M
TYPE 1
TYPE 2
ECHO CANCEL — This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. AV
TYPE 3
TYPE 4
TYPE 1 O
TYPE 2
NOISE CANCEL — This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
TYPE 3
TYPE 4
P
14DAYS Set at 14 days (default)

2DAYS Set at 2 days Set value for continued operation time to control
TCU STANDBY TIME
30DAYS Set at 30 days battery consumption
NON No setting

Display item Display Condition Note
SENSOR ANGLE X — —
SENSOR ANGLE Y — —
SENSOR ANGLE Z — —
Indicates state of configuration result.
SVTB ENABLE/DISABLE — NOTE:
This item is displayed, but not used.
REMOTE DOOR LOCK ENABLE/DISABLE —
REMOTE HORN & LAMP ENABLE/DISABLE —
REMOTE START ENABLE/DISABLE —
When TCU activation is
On
ON NAD: Abbreviation of Network Access Device.
NAD OUTPUT STATUS
When TCU activation is ON/OFF setting of radio wave
Off
OFF
ACN COMM SEQUENCE LOG — — NOTE:
SOS COMM SEQUENCE LOG — — This item is displayed, but not used.
WORK SUPPORT
Performs TCU activation setting and center connection setting.
Item name Description

SAVE VIN DATA The vehicle identification number data saved in TCU is stored in CONSULT.
TCU ACTIVATE SETTING TCU ON/OFF setting is available.
Write vehicle identification number data stored by “SAVE VIN DATA” in work support
WRITE VIN (SAVED DATA)
mode to TCU.
WRITE VIN (MANUAL INPUT) Write vehicle identification number data in TCU. (MANUAL)
ECU IDENTIFICATION
Displays TCU part number and various ID numbers.
Display items Description

ECU PART NUMBER Displays TCU part number.
UNIT ID Displays AV control unit ID number.
TCU ID Displays TCU ID number.
SIM ID Displays ICC ID of SIM card.
V.I.N Displays the vehicle identification number stored in TCU.
CONFIGURATION
Configuration includes functions as follows.
Allows the reading of vehicle specification written in TCU to store
Before ECU Replacement
the specification in CONSULT.
Read/Write Configuration
Allows the writing of the vehicle information stored in CONSULT
After ECU Replacement
into the TCU.
Manual Configuration Allows the writing of the vehicle specification into the TCU by hand.

TCU
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [TELEMATICS SYSTEM]

TCU
B

NOTE: C
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.
CONSULT MONITOR ITEM
D
HF TYPE Ignition switch ON BT
AUDIO UNIT TYPE Ignition switch ON NAVI E
CALL SWITCH TYPE Ignition switch ON SOS
SPEAKER TYPE Ignition switch ON INDRCT
F
ZONE Ignition switch ON PRC
CHANNEL Ignition switch ON NISSAN
CAN COMM Ignition switch ON GEN.3 G
AV COMM Ignition switch ON ENABLE
K-LINE Ignition switch ON DISABLE
VEHICLE TYPE Ignition switch ON ENG H
ECHO CANCEL Ignition switch ON TYPE1
NOISE CANCEL Ignition switch ON TYPE1
I
Set at 14 days (default) 14DAYS
Set at 2 days 2DAYS
TCU STANDBY TIME
Set at 30 days 30DAYS J
No setting NON
SENSOR ANGLE X Ignition switch ON 4.0
K
SENSOR ANGLE Y Ignition switch ON 4.0
SENSOR ANGLE Z Ignition switch ON 4.0
SVTB Ignition switch ON DISABLE L
REMOTE DOOR LOCK Ignition switch ON DISABLE
REMOTE HORN & LAMP Ignition switch ON DISABLE
M
REMOTE START Ignition switch ON DISABLE
When TCU activation is ON On
NAD OUTPUT STATUS
When TCU activation is OFF Off AV
ACN COMM SEQUENCE LOG Ignition switch ON 0
SOS COMM SEQUENCE LOG Ignition switch ON 0
O
TERMINAL LAYOUT
AWNIA4097ZZ

TCU
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/Out- (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
put
1
Ground Battery power supply Input Ignition switch OFF Battery Voltage
(L)
5
Ground SOS switch LED signal Input Ignition switch ON 5.0 V
(Y)
6 Input/Out-
— CAN high — —
(L) put
7 Input/Out-
— CAN low — —
(R) put
10
Ground Ignition signal Input Ignition switch ON 12.0 V
(LG)
11
— Microphone output ground — — —
(Shield)
Ignition switch ON
12 11
Microphone output signal Output • When inputting interior
(W) (Shield)
sound
SKIB3609E
16
— Microphone ground — — —
(Shield)
Ignition switch ON
17 16
Microphone signal Input • When inputting interior
(W) (Shield)
sound
SKIB3609E
18 16
Microphone VCC Output Ignition switch ON 4.72 V
(B) (Shield)
26 Input/Out-
— AV communication high — —
(SB) put
27 Input/Out-
— AV communication low — —
(LG) put
28
— Ground — — —
(B)
29
— Ground — — —
(B)
Ignition switch ON
31 32
Sound signal (+) Input • When inputting interior
(R) (L)
sound
SKIB3609E
32
— Sound signal (−) — — —
(L)

TCU
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/Out- (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
put
Ignition switch ON B
37 • When pressing SOS 0V
Ground SOS call switch signal Input switch (telematics switch)
(BG)
Except for above 5.0 V C
41
— V BUS signal — — —
(B)
43 D
— USB D- signal — — —
(G)
44
— USB D+ signal — — —
(W) E
45
— USB ground — — —
(R)
46 F
— USB shield — — —
(Shield)
47
Ground TEL antenna signal Input TEL antenna disconnected. 5.0 V
(B)
G
48
— TEL antenna shield — — —
(Shield)
49 H
Ground GPS antenna signal Input GPS antenna disconnected. 5.0 V
(B)
50
— GPS antenna shield — — —
(Shield)
I
Fail-safe INFOID:0000000015258908
If a malfunction occurs in the telematics system, TCU performs fail-safe activation according to the detected J
malfunction.

K
• Some telematics system does not function.
Air-bag connection U1A10
• Telematics system does not function. L
CAN communication U1000
• Telematics switch LED indicator turn OFF.
(LED indicator turns ON 10 times when push the SOS call switch.)
TEL antenna U1A06 M
Connect center.
• Telematics system cannot send correct positional information. U1A09
GPS antenna
• Inform a NissanConnect center about abnormality. U1A0A AV
USB communication B13D9
B1310 O
B130D
B2EF0-16
B2EF0-49
Telematics system function stops. B2EF0-4A P
B2EF0-4B
TCU U1010
U1A01
U1A02
• Telematics system function stops.
U1A03
U1A11
Connect center.

TCU
Telematics switch • Telematics system does not function. (Only SOS call does not operate.) B2E33
(SOS call switch) • Telematics switch LED indicator is turned OFF. U1A0E
• Transmit an own vehicle position to the NissanConnect center.
Microphone U1A0B
VIN Telematics service does not function. U1A04
DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000015258909
If multiple DTCs are detected simultaneously, check them one by one depending on the following DTC inspec-
tion priority chart.
Priority Detected items (DTC)

1 U1A04: VIN UNFINISHED
• U1000: CAN COMM CIRCUIT
2
• U1010: CONTROL UNIT(CAN)
• B130D: TEL LINE OUT ERROR
• B1310: TCU TEMPERATURE ERROR
• B13D9: USB CONNECTION
• B2E33: ECALL BUTTON
• B2EF0-16: INTERNAL BATTERY
• B2EF0-49: INTERNAL BATTERY
• B2EF0-4A: INTERNAL BATTERY
• B2EF0-4B: INTERNAL BATTERY
• U1A01: INTERNAL ERROR (TCU)
3 • U1A02: TEL COMMUNICATION MODULE
• U1A03: SIM CARD
• U1A05: USB COMM
• U1A06: TEL ANTENNA ERROR
• U1A09: GPS ANTENNA CONN
• U1A0A: GPS MODULE COMM
• U1A0B: MIC IN CONN
• U1A0E: SOS SWITCH ON STUCK
• U1A10: AIRBAG SIGNAL
• U1A11: TEL MUTE OUTPUT SIGNAL NO CONN
DTC Display contents of CONSULT Reference

B130D TEL LINE OUT ERROR AV-499, "DTC Description"
B1310 TCU TEMPERATURE ERROR AV-501, "DTC Description"
B13D9 USB CONNECTION AV-502, "DTC Description"
B2E33 ECALL BUTTON AV-503, "DTC Description"
B2EF0-16
B2EF0-49
INTERNAL BATTERY AV-505, "DTC Description"
B2EF0-4A
B2EF0-4B
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT AV-506, "DTC Description"
U1010 CONTROL UNIT(CAN) AV-507, "DTC Description"
U1A01 INTERNAL ERROR (TCU) AV-508, "DTC Description"
U1A02 TEL COMMUNICATION MODULE AV-509, "DTC Description"
U1A03 SIM CARD AV-510, "DTC Description"
U1A04 VIN UNFINISHED AV-511, "DTC Description"
U1A05 USB COMM AV-512, "DTC Description"

TCU
DTC Display contents of CONSULT Reference
A
U1A06 TEL ANTENNA ERROR AV-514, "DTC Description"
U1A09 GPS ANTENNA CONN AV-516, "DTC Description"
U1A0A GPS MODULE COMM AV-518, "DTC Description" B
U1A0B MIC IN CONN AV-519, "DTC Description"
U1A0E SOS SWITCH ON STUCK AV-521, "DTC Description"
U1A10 AIRBAG SIGNAL AV-523, "DTC Description" C
U1A11 TEL MUTE OUTPUT SIGNAL NO CONN AV-524, "DTC Description"
AV

TELEMATICS SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [TELEMATICS SYSTEM]
WIRING DIAGRAM
TELEMATICS SYSTEM
AANWA1825GB

TELEMATICS SYSTEM
AV
AANIA5790GB

TELEMATICS SYSTEM
AANIA5791GB

TELEMATICS SYSTEM
AV
AANIA5792GB

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [TELEMATICS SYSTEM]
BASIC INSPECTION
OVERALL SEQUENCE
JSNIA4482GB
• Reference 1··· Refer to AV-483, "CONSULT Function".

• Reference 2··· Refer to AV-488, "DTC Index".
• Reference 3··· Refer to AV-527, "Symptom Table".
DETAILED FLOW
1.INTERVIEW AND SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION
Check the malfunction symptoms by performing the following items.
• Interview the customer to obtain the malfunction information (conditions and environment when the malfunc-
tion occurred).
• Check the symptom.
Is the occurred symptom malfunction?
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.DIAGNOSIS WITH CONSULT
1. Connect CONSULT and perform a self-diagnosis for “TCU”. Refer to AV-483, "CONSULT Function".
2. When DTC is detected, follow the instructions below: A
- Record DTC and Freeze Frame Data.
Is DTC displayed?
YES >> GO TO 3. B
NO >> GO TO 4.
3.TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC
C
1. Check the DTC indicated in the self-diagnosis results.
2. Perform the relevant diagnosis referring to the DTC Index. Refer to AV-488, "DTC Index".
D
>> GO TO 5.
4.TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
Perform the relevant diagnosis referring to the diagnosis chart by symptom. Refer to AV-527, "Symptom E
Table".
>> GO TO 5. F
5.ERROR PART REPAIR
1. Repair or replace the identified malfunctioning parts. G
2. Perform a self-diagnosis for “TCU” with CONSULT.
3. Check that the symptom does not occur.
Does the symptom occur? H
YES >> GO TO 1.
I
AV

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING TCU
When TCU is replaced, TCU activation operation is required. Refer to AV-496, "Work Procedure".
PREPARATION BEFORE ACTIVATION OPERATION
• Subscribe to telematics service
• Preregister user ID and password (can be performed from owner homepage)
1.TURN TCU OFF

CONSULT Work support
1. Select TCU ACTIVATE SETTING, then Start.
2. Select Start, then select Off to turn OFF the TCU.
3. Select End to return to the Work support Test Item screen.
>> GO TO 2.
2.SAVE VIN DATA
NOTE:
If the VIN data cannot be saved, it will have to be entered manually later in this procedure.
1. Select SAVE VIN DATA, then Start.
2. Select Start to save the VIN data.
3. Select End to return to the Work support Test Item screen.
>> GO TO 3.
3.REMOVE TCU
Remove the TCU. Refer to AV-531, "Removal and Installation".
>> GO TO 4.
4.RECORD TCU PART LABEL INFORMATION
NOTE:
Step 4 must be performed after the original TCU has been removed from the vehicle and before the replace-
ment TCU is installed.
Collect, record and have the following information ready:

• VIN.
• International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI) number of the original TCU. Located on the TCU part label.
• International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI) number of the replacement TCU. Located on the TCU part
label.
• Serial number of the replacement TCU. Located on the TCU part label.

AWNIA4537ZZ
E
>> GO TO 5.
F
5.INSTALL TCU
Install the replacement TCU. Refer to AV-531, "Removal and Installation".
G
>> GO TO 6.
6.VIN DATA H
Was the VIN data saved during step 2?

YES >> GO TO 7. I
NO >> GO TO 8.
7.WRITE VIN DATA
J
1. Select WRITE VIN DATA, then Start.
2. Select Start.
3. After the data writing has been completed, select End to return to the Work support Test Item screen. K
>> GO TO 9.
L
8.MANUALLY ENTER VIN DATA
1. Select VIN REGISTRATION. M
2. Enter the VIN number in the VIN (1ST TIME) field.
3. Enter the VIN number in the VIN (2ND TIME) field.
4. Select Start. AV
5. After the VIN registration has been completed, select End to return to the Work support Test Item screen.
>> GO TO 9. O
9.REGISTER INTELLIGENT KEYS
For initialization and registration of Intelligent Keys, refer to CONSULT Immobilizer mode and follow the on-
screen instructions. P
>> GO TO 10.
10.CONTACT SIRIUSXM CALL CENTER
NOTICE:
This step must be performed to activate the replacement TCU. If this step is not performed, the TCU will not
be able to communicate with the NissanConnect Data Center.
1. Call the SiriusXM call center. You will be asked for your name, dealer name, and the information collected
in step 4. The call agent will deactivate the original TCU and activate the replacement TCU.
2. Wait for the SiriusXM Call center agent to call back, confirming TCU registration.
NOTE:
• This step may take 1–2 hours.
• TCU registration does not enroll the customer in NissanConnect Services.
>> GO TO 11.
11.TURN TCU ON
1. Select “TCU ACTIVATE SETTING”, then “Start”.
2. Select “Start”, then select “ON” to turn ON the TCU.
3. Select “End”, to return to the Work support Test Item screen.
4. Select “TCU ACTIVATE SETTING”, then “Start”.
5. Select “Start”, and confirm that On is displayed in the Current status field.
>> GO TO 12.
12.CONFIRM TCU ACTIVATION
1. Follow the instructions in TSB to confirm TCU activation.
2. Confirm the telematics switch LED indicator is turned ON.
>> Work End.

B130D TCU
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [TELEMATICS SYSTEM]
B130D TCU
B
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

C
D
Sound signal between TCU and AV control unit
TEL LINE OUT ERROR Signal (terminal)
B130D (terminals 31 and 32)
(Telephone line out error)
Threshold — E
Diagnosis delay time 1 second or more
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Sound signal circuits between TCU and AV control unit F
• TCU
• AV control unit
G
FAIL-SAFE
Telematics system function stops
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE H
CONSULT I
2. Erase DTC using CONSULT.
3. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of ”TELEMATICS”.
4. Check DTC. J
Is DTC U130D detected?
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-54, "Intermittent Incident". K
L

M
1.CHECK CONTINUITY BETWEEN TCU AND AV CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT

AV
2. Disconnect TCU connector M35 and AV control unit connector M106.
3. Check continuity between TCU connector M35 and AV control unit connector M106.
O
TCU AV control unit
Continuity
Connector terminal Connector terminal
P
31 60
M35 M106 Yes
32 64
4. Check continuity between TCU connector M35 and ground.

B130D TCU
TCU
Continuity
Connector terminal
Ground
31
M35 No
32
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SOUND SIGNAL
1. Connect TCU connector M35 and AV control unit connector M106.
3. Check signal between the terminals of TCU connector M35.
TCU connector M35

Terminal
31 32 When interior sound is input
SKIB3609E

YES >> Replace TCU. Refer to AV-531, "Removal and Installation".

B1310 TCU
B1310 TCU
A

TCU TEMPERATURE ERROR Signal (terminal) —

B1310
(TCU temperature error) Threshold TCU internal temperature is high D
POSSIBLE CAUSE E
• TCU internal temperature is high
• TCU
FAIL-SAFE F
G
CONSULT
3. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “TELEMATICS”.
4. Check DTC. I
Is DTC B1310 detected?
K
1.CHECK AROUND TCU
Check whether there is any factor which causes a temperature rise near TCU.
L
Was there any factor?
YES >> Remove the factor.
NO >> GO TO 2.
M
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE AGAIN
Perform DTC confirmation procedure again. Refer to AV-501, "DTC Description".
Is DTC B1310 detected again? AV
O

B13D9 TCU
B13D9 TCU
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

USB CONNECTION Signal (terminal) USB communication signal

B13D9
(USB connection) Threshold —
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• USB harness
• TCU
FAIL-SAFE
• Telematics system does not function
• Inform a NissanConnect center about abnormality
CONSULT
4. Check DTC.
Is DTC B13D9 detected?
1.CHECK USB HARNESS CONNECTION

2. Visually inspect USB harness connectors M110 and M173 between AV control unit and TCU.
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace USB harness.
Is DTC B13D9 detected again?

B2E33 TELEMATICS SWITCH
A

ECALL BUTTON Signal (terminal) SOS switch LED signal (terminal 5)

B2E33
(Ecall button) Threshold — D
POSSIBLE CAUSE E
• SOS switch LED signal circuit
• SOS switch
FAIL-SAFE F
• Telematics system does not function (Only SOS call does not operate)
• SOS switch LED indicator is turned OFF

CONSULT H
3. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “TELEMATICS”. I
4. Check DTC.
Is DTC B2E33 detected?
1.CHECK SOS SWITCH LED SIGNAL M

2. Check the voltage between TCU connector M35 and ground.
AV
TCU Voltage
Ground
M35 5 –— 3.5 V
O

YES >> GO TO 2. P
NO >> Replace TCU. Refer to AV-531, "Removal and Installation".
2.CHECK SOS SWITCH LED SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
2. Disconnect TCU connector M35 and telematics switch connector.
3. Check the continuity between TCU connector M35 and telematics switch connector R21.

TCU Telematics switch

Continuity
M35 5 R21 1 Yes
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK SOS SWITCH LED SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
Check the continuity between TCU connector M35 and ground.
TCU
Continuity
M35 5 Yes
YES >> Replace telematics switch. Refer to AV-532, "Removal and Installation".

B2EF0 TCU
B2EF0 TCU
A

B2EF0-16
B2EF0-49 INTERNAL BATTERY Signal (terminal) —
B2EF0-4A (Internal battery) Threshold TCU internal malfunction D
B2EF0-4B
Diagnosis delay time Less than 1 second
POSSIBLE CAUSE E
TCU
FAIL-SAFE
Telematics system function stops F

CONSULT
2. Erase DTC using CONSULT. H
4. Check DTC.
Is DTC B2EF0 detected? I
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE AGAIN K

Is DTC B2EF0 detected again? L
M
AV

DESCRIPTION
tion Signal Chart".
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CAN COMM CIRCUIT Signal (terminal) CAN communication signal

U1000
POSSIBLE CAUSE
FAIL-SAFE
• Telematics system does not function
CONSULT
3. Check DTC.

CONSULT
2. Erase DTC.
4. Check DTC.

A
DESCRIPTION B
tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other C
CAN Communication Signal Chart. Refer to LAN-44, "CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : CAN Communica- D
tion Signal Chart".
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
E
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON. F
CONTROL UNIT(CAN)
U1010 Initial diagnosis abnormality of the TCU
[Control unit(CAN)] Threshold G
CAN controller
POSSIBLE CAUSE H
FAIL-SAFE I
Telematics system does not function
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE J
CONSULT
K
3. Check DTC.
L
M
AV
CONSULT
O
2. Erase DTC.
4. Check DTC. P
YES >> Replace the TCU. Refer to AV-531, "Removal and Installation".

U1A01 TCU
U1A01 TCU
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

INTERNAL ERROR (TCU) Signal (terminal) —

U1A01
[Internal error (TCU)] Threshold TCU internal malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSE
TCU
FAIL-SAFE
CONSULT
4. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1A01 detected?

Is DTC U1A01 detected again?

U1A02 TCU
U1A02 TCU
A

TEL COMMUNICATION MODULE Signal (terminal) —

U1A02
(Telephone communication module) Threshold TCU internal malfunction D
POSSIBLE CAUSE E
TCU
FAIL-SAFE
Telematics system function stops F

CONSULT
2. Erase DTC using CONSULT. H
4. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1A012detected? I
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE AGAIN K

Is DTC U1A02 detected again? L
M
AV

U1A03 TCU
U1A03 TCU
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

SIM CARD Signal (terminal) —

U1A03
(SIM card) Threshold —
POSSIBLE CAUSE
TCU
FAIL-SAFE
• Telematics system function stops
• Call the NissanConnect Data Center and inform them that the telematics system cannot be connected.
CONSULT
4. Check DTC.

CONSULT
4. Check DTC.

U1A04 TCU
U1A04 TCU
A

VIN UNFINISHED Signal (terminal) —

U1A04
(VIN unfinished) Threshold Vehicle identification number is not written D
POSSIBLE CAUSE E
• VIN number is not written
• TCU
FAIL-SAFE F
Telematics system does not function
G
CONSULT
4. Check DTC. I
K
1.PERFORM WRITING VIN DATA TO TCU
Perform writing VIN data to TCU. Refer to AV-496, "Description".
L
Was the writing of VIN data completed?
YES >> GO TO 2.
M
Is DTC U1A04 detected again? AV
O

U1A05 TCU
U1A05 TCU
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

USB COMM
U1A05 Malfunction in USB communication be-
(USB comm) Threshold
tween TCU and AV control unit
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• USB harness
• TCU
FAIL-SAFE
—
CONSULT
3. Check DTC.
1.CHECK USB CIRCUITS CONTINUITY

TCU AV control unit

Continuity
41 68
43 70
M173 44 M110 71 Yes
45 72
46 73
4. Check the continuity between TCU connector M173 and ground.

U1A05 TCU
TCU A
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
41
M173 — No B
44
YES >> Replace TCU. Refer to AV-531, "Removal and Installation". C
AV

U1A06 TEL ANTENNA
U1A06 TEL ANTENNA
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

TEL ANTENNA ERROR Signal (terminal) TEL antenna signal

U1A06
(TEL antenna error) Threshold No input
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• TEL antenna signal circuit
• TEL antenna
• TCU
FAIL-SAFE
• Telematics switch LED indicator turned OFF (LED indicator turns ON 10 times when SOS call switch is
pressed)
• When telematics system is operated, inform that system cannot be connected to NISSANCONNECTSM cen-
ter
CONSULT
3. Check DTC.
1.CHECK TELEMATICS ANTENNA

Visually check telematics antenna and antenna feeder. Refer to AV-533, "Removal and Installation".
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK TCU VOLTAGE
1. Disconnect TCU harness connector M174.
3. Check voltage between TCU connector M174 and ground.
TCU Voltage
Connector Terminal Ground (Approx.)
M174 47 2.8 V

U1A06 TEL ANTENNA
YES >> Replace telematics antenna. Refer to AV-533, "Removal and Installation". A
AV

U1A09 GPS ANTENNA
U1A09 GPS ANTENNA
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

GPS ANTENNA CONN Signal (terminal) GPS antenna signal

U1A09
(GPS antenna connection) Threshold No input
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• GPS antenna signal circuit
• GPS antenna
FAIL-SAFE
• Telematics system cannot send correct position inform
CONSULT
4. Check DTC.
1.CHECK TELEMATICS ANTENNA

Visually check telematics antenna and antenna feeder. Refer to AV-533, "Removal and Installation".
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK TCU VOLTAGE
1. Disconnect TCU connector M175.
3. Check voltage between TCU terminal and ground.
(+)
Voltage
TCU (−)
(Approx.)
Terminal
49 Ground 5.0 V

U1A09 GPS ANTENNA
YES >> Replace telematics antenna. Refer to AV-533, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace TCU. Refer to AV-531, "Removal and Installation". A
AV

U1A0A TCU
U1A0A TCU
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

GPS MODULE COMM
U1A0A Malfunction in the GPS module internal to
(GPS module comm) Threshold
TCU
POSSIBLE CAUSE
TCU
FAIL-SAFE
—
CONSULT
3. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1A0A detected?

CONSULT
2. Erase DTC.
4. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1A0A detected?
YES >> Replace the TCU. Refer to AV-531, "Removal and Installation".

U1A0B MICROPHONE
U1A0B MICROPHONE
A

MIC IN CONN Signal (terminal) —

U1A0B
(MIC in conn) Threshold No input of microphone circuits D
POSSIBLE CAUSE E
• Harness or connectors
• Microphone
• TCU F
FAIL-SAFE
• Transmit an own vehicle position to the NissanConnect center
• Inform a NissanConnect center about abnormality G
CONSULT
3. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1A0B detected?
1.CHECK MIC IN SIGNAL CIRCUIT AND MIC VCC CIRCUIT CONTINUITY M

2. Disconnect TCU connector M35 and microphone connector R8.
3. Check continuity between TCU connector M35 and microphone connector R8. AV
TCU Microphone
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal O
16 2
M35 17 R8 1 Yes
P
18 4
4. Check the continuity between TCU connector M35 and ground.
TCU
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal

U1A0B MICROPHONE
17
M35 — No
18
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK MIC VCC VOLTAGE
1. Connect TCU connector M35 and microphone connector R8.
3. Check voltage between terminals of TCU connector M35.
TCU connector M35

Voltage
(+) (−)
(Approx.)
Terminal Terminal
18 16 5.0 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK MIC IN SIGNAL
Check signal between terminals of TCU connector M35.
TCU connector M35

Terminal Terminal
SKIB3609E


U1A0E TELEMATICS SWITCH
A

SOS SWITCH ON STUCK Signal (terminal) SOS switch signal

U1A0E
(SOS switch ON stuck) Threshold Continue being turned ON D
POSSIBLE CAUSE E
• Telematics switch
• TCU F
FAIL-SAFE
• Telematics system does not function (Only SOS call does not operate)
• Telematics switch LED indicator is turned OFF G
CONSULT
3. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1A0E detected?
1.CHECK ECALL SW FOR SHORT CIRCUIT M

2. Disconnect TCU connector M35 and telematics switch connector R21.
3. Check the continuity between TCU connector M35 and ground. AV
TCU
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal O
M35 37 — No
Is the inspection result normal? P
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK TELEMATICS SWITCH
Check continuity between telematics switch terminals.

Telematics switch connector R21

Condition Continuity
Terminal Terminal
Switch pressed Yes
3 2
Switch released No
NO >> Replace telematics switch. Refer to AV-532, "Removal and Installation".

U1A10 TCU
U1A10 TCU
A

AIRBAG SIGNAL Signal (terminal) Car crash information signal

U1A10
(Airbag signal) Threshold Abnormality D
POSSIBLE CAUSE E
FAIL-SAFE
• Some telematics system does not function F
G
CONSULT
3. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1A10 detected? I
1.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT OF AIR BAG

CONSULT L
2. Erase DTC.
3. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG”. M
4. Check DTC.
Are any DTCs detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-16, "DTC Index". AV
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT OF TELEMATICS
O
CONSULT
2. Erase DTC.
3. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “TELEMATICS”. P
4. Check DTC.

U1A11 TCU
U1A11 TCU
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

TEL MUTE OUTPUT SIGNAL NO Signal (terminal) —

U1A11 CONN Malfunction is detected in audio signal cir-
(TEL mute output signal NO conn) Threshold
cuits between TCU and AV control unit
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• TCU
• AV control unit
FAIL-SAFE
• Telematics system function stops
• Call the NissanConnect Data Center and inform them that the telematics system cannot be connected.
CONSULT
3. Check DTC.
1.CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN TCU AND AV CONTROL UNIT

TCU AV control unit

Continuity
31 60
M35 M106 Yes
32 64
TCU
Continuity
Connector Terminals Ground
M35 31 No

U1A11 TCU
YES >> GO TO 2. A
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK AUDIO SIGNAL
B
1. Connect TCU connector M35 and AV control unit connector M106.
3. Check signal between TCU connector M35 terminals.
C
TCU connector M35
Terminal Terminal Condition Reference value
D
(+) (−)
When inputting interior

31 32
sound
F
SKIB3609E
Is the inspection result normal? G

H
AV

1.CHECK FUSE
Check that the following fuses are not blown.

10 Ignition signal 30 (10A)
NO >> GO TO 2.
2. Disconnect TCU connector M35.
3. Check voltage between TCU connector M35 and ground.
TCU Voltage
Ground Condition

YES >> GO TO 3.
TCU
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
28
M35 — Yes
29

TELEMATICS SYSTEM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [TELEMATICS SYSTEM]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
TELEMATICS SYSTEM
B
TELEMATICS SYSTEM
C
Display
Symptom Error message Possible cause
icon
Perform self-diagnosis with CONSULT.
— Telematics unit is not connected. D
Refer to AV-483, "CONSULT Function".
Check ON/OFF status of TCU using the data monitor of
CONSULT.
• Replace TCU if it is ON. E
The connection to the center failed. Refer to AV-531, "Removal and Installation".
• Turn it ON again if it is OFF. Replace TCU if ON is
switched to OFF.
Refer to AV-531, "Removal and Installation". F
Use a cellular phone to check reception.
• If service is available, replace TCU or TEL antenna.
- For TCU replacement, refer to AV-531, "Removal and G
Installation".
No service. - For TEL antenna replacement, refer to AV-533, "Re-
• If the service is not available, move the vehicle to the H
position where service is available and perform the
operation again.
Use a cellular phone to check reception. I
• If it is OK, there may be a cause at the NissanConnect
Data Center. Check connection after a short period of
time. If there is no problem at the NissanConnect Data
Telematics operation J
Center, replace TCU or TEL antenna.
not available.
Service inoperative due to poor reception. - For TCU replacement, refer to AV-531, "Removal and
Installation".
- For TEL antenna replacement, refer to AV-533, "Re-
K
• If it is NG, check connection again after a short period
of time.
Check input of user ID and password from the naviga- L
tion setting screen. If malfunction such as input or no
Service not registered. memory despite input is detected, replace AV control
unit.
Refer to AV-529, "Removal and Installation". M
Check connection after a short period of time.
TCU line is used. Replace TCU if it is frequently displayed.
Refer to AV-531, "Removal and Installation". AV
There may be a cause at the NissanConnect Data Cen-
ter. Check connection after a short period of time. If
there is no problem at the NissanConnect Data Center, O
replace TCU or TEL antenna.
The connection to the center failed.
• For TCU replacement, refer to AV-531, "Removal and
Installation".
• For TEL antenna replacement, refer to AV-533, "Re- P

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [TELEMATICS SYSTEM]
NOTE:
For Telematics system operation detail information, refer to Navigation system Owner's Manual.
Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

Sign up for a subscription to the Nissan-
Connect service. For details about sub-
A subscription for the CONNECT service has not been
scriptions, contact an NISSAN dealer or
established.
visit the NissanConnect Data Center web-
site.
The user ID and password are not entered. Enter the user ID and password.
The communication line is busy. Try again after a short period of time.
When the vehicle moves to an area where
The system cannot connect to
radio waves can be transmitted sufficiently,
the NissanConnect Data Cen-
communication will be restored. When the
ter. The vehicle is in a location where reception is difficult.
icon on the display shows that the vehicle
is inside the communication area, the sys-
tem can be used.
When the vehicle moves to an area where
radio waves can be transmitted sufficiently,
communication will be restored. When the
TCU reception is insufficient.
icon on the display shows that the vehicle
is inside the communication area, the sys-
tem can be used.
Some of the items that are dis- The vehicle is being driven. Stop the vehi-
played on the menu screen cle in a safe location and apply the parking
cannot be selected. The vehicle is being driven and some menu items are brake before operating the functions.
disabled. Operate the system after stopping the ve-
Some parts of the screen are
hicle in a safe location and applying the
not displayed
parking brake.
Adjust the volume level by operating the
The system does not announce VOL switches located on the control panel
The volume level is set to the minimum.
information. or on the steering switch while the system
is announcing information.

AV CONTROL UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [TELEMATICS SYSTEM]

AV CONTROL UNIT
B
AWNIA3339ZZ J

K
REMOVAL
CAUTION: L
NOTE:
O
sary).
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:

AV CONTROL UNIT
• When replacing AV control unit, perform "WRITE CONFIGURATION". Refer to AV-190, "CONFIGURA-
• When replacing AV control unit, the AV control unit must be registered. Refer to AV-191, "REGISTRA-

TCU
TCU
A
REMOVAL B
CAUTION:
Before replacing TCU, perform "SAVE VIN DATA" to save current vehicle specification. For details,
refer to AV-496, "Description". C
1. Remove glove box. Refer to IP-23, "Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect the harness connectors (A) from the TCU (1).
3. Remove screws (B), then remove TCU with bracket attached. D
AWNIA4177ZZ
G
4. Slide TCU off bracket to remove, if necessary.
INSTALLATION
H
CAUTION:
After installation, perform activation. Refer to AV-496, "Description".
I
AV

TELEMATICS SWITCH
TELEMATICS SWITCH
The telematics switch is serviced as part of the room/map lamp. Refer to INL-52, "Removal and Installation".

TEL ANTENNA
TEL ANTENNA
A
REMOVAL B
1. Remove instrument panel. Refer to IP-14, "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installa-
tion".
2. Remove screw (A) to remove telematics antenna (1) from instru- C
ment panel.
ALNIA1797ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
G
AV

MICROPHONE
MICROPHONE
REMOVAL
2. Disconnect the microphone connector (A) from the map lamp
assembly (2).
3. Release the microphone pawls, then remove the microphone
(1).
: Pawl
ALNIA1366ZZ
INSTALLATION

Audio, Visual & Navigation System: Section

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Audio, Visual & Navigation System: Section

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DRIVER INFORMATION & MULTIMEDIA

AUDIO, VISUAL & NAVIGATION SYSTEM

Revision: December 2016 AV-1 2017 Rogue HEV NAM

MICROPHONE ................................................... 71 INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT .................. 112

Revision: December 2016 AV-2 2017 Rogue HEV NAM

Revision: December 2016 AV-3 2017 Rogue HEV NAM

COMPONENT PARTS ..................................... 253 DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 293

U1263 USB ...................................................... 301 REAR DOOR SPEAKER .................................. 325

U1304 CAMERA IMAGE CALIBRATION ....... 435 SYSTEM ........................................................... 450

Revision: December 2016 AV-8 2017 Rogue HEV NAM

PREPARATION ......................................... 477 DTC Description .................................................... 503

Revision: December 2016 AV-9 2017 Rogue HEV NAM

U1A10 TCU ...................................................... 523 TCU ................................................................... 531

Revision: December 2016 AV-10 2017 Rogue HEV NAM

Revision: December 2016 AV-11 2017 Rogue HEV NAM

Revision: December 2016 AV-12 2017 Rogue HEV NAM

Revision: December 2016 AV-13 2017 Rogue HEV NAM

No. Component Function

Revision: December 2016 AV-14 2017 Rogue HEV NAM

REAR DOOR SPEAKER M

Revision: December 2016 AV-15 2017 Rogue HEV NAM

• USB Interface and AUX in jack is installed in the console.

Steering Switches INFOID:0000000015258246

• Steering switches are installed in the steering wheel.

• The microphone is installed in the roof in the map lamp assembly.

Combination Meter INFOID:0000000015258248

• Combination meter sends the speed signal to the audio unit.

Antenna and Antenna Feeder INFOID:0000000015258249

Revision: December 2016 AV-16 2017 Rogue HEV NAM

ANTENNA FEEDER LAYOUT J

Revision: December 2016 AV-17 2017 Rogue HEV NAM

1. M503 2. M502 3. M130, M501

Revision: December 2016 AV-18 2017 Rogue HEV NAM

Revision: December 2016 AV-19 2017 Rogue HEV NAM

On Board Diagnosis Function INFOID:0000000014844267

4. The trouble diagnosis initial screen is displayed, and Self Diag-

SELF DIAGNOSIS MODE

Revision: December 2016 AV-20 2017 Rogue HEV NAM

1: Control unit (audio unit) is displayed in red.

Audio Unit Self Diagnosis Results

A Connecting Cable Between Units Is Displayed In Yellow

Revision: December 2016 AV-21 2017 Rogue HEV NAM

Revision: December 2016 AV-22 2017 Rogue HEV NAM

Display type of occurrence

Error item Description Possible cause

Revision: December 2016 AV-23 2017 Rogue HEV NAM

Revision: December 2016 AV-24 2017 Rogue HEV NAM

Revision: December 2016 AV-25 2017 Rogue HEV NAM

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION

2 3 Sound signal front door

4 5 Sound signal rear door

11 12 Sound signal front door

Revision: December 2016 AV-26 2017 Rogue HEV NAM

13 14 Sound signal rear door C

21 Received audio signal I

Revision: December 2016 AV-27 2017 Rogue HEV NAM

42 Camera image displayed 6.0 V

45 47 While speaking into micro-

Revision: December 2016 AV-28 2017 Rogue HEV NAM

Revision: December 2016 AV-29 2017 Rogue HEV NAM

Revision: December 2016 AV-30 2017 Rogue HEV NAM

Revision: December 2016 AV-31 2017 Rogue HEV NAM

Revision: December 2016 AV-32 2017 Rogue HEV NAM